2017 RENEGADE USER GUIDE

Transcription

1 2017 RENEGADE USER GUIDE

2 If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner s Manual, Navigation/ Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklets by calling (U.S.) or (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver s responsibility to comply with all local laws. Important: This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your Owner s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling

3 Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ( FCA US ) vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. Your new FCA US LLC vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under some driving conditions. These are to assist the driver and are never a substitute for attentive driving. They can never take the driver's place. Always drive carefully. Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your passengers. Some of these should not be used when driving because they take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving. Never text while driving, or more than momentarily take your eyes off the road. This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are not available on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with the important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate and maintain the vehicle, including emergency information. For complete owner information, refer to your Owner's Manual at manuals/ for further details. For your convenience, the information contained on this site may also be printed and saved for future reference. FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By converting from paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user information for your vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the stress on our environment. When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your Jeep vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts, and cares about your satisfaction. WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC 1

4 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Essential Information Each time direction instructions (left/right or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, these must be intended as regarding an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properly specified in the text. The figures in this User Guide are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the User Guide has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position or construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure. To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this User Guide. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is anyway a textual indication of the current chapter at the side of each even page. Symbols Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully. Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up. 2

5 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS While reading this User Guide you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. VEHICLE CHANGES/ ALTERATIONS IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 3

6 4

7 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND OPERATING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE INDEX

8 6

9 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL....8 INTERIOR...9 7

10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL Instrument Panel 1 Air Vents 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Radio 4 Hand Grip 5 Glove Compartment 6 Steering Wheel 7 Windshield Wiper Lever 8 Headlight Switch 8

11 INTERIOR Interior Features 1 Power Window Switches 2 Radio 3 Switch Panel 4 Climate Controls 5 Seats 6 Transmission Gear Selector (Automatic/Manual Options) 7 Selec-Terrain Mode Knob If Equipped 9

12 10

13 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KEYS...13 Key Fob With Remote Control...13 IGNITIONSWITCH...14 Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IFEQUIPPED...15 SENTRYKEY...16 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IFEQUIPPED...16 To Arm The System...16 To Disarm The System...16 DOORS...17 Manual Door Locks...17 Power Door Locks...18 Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry If Equipped...19 Dead Lock Device If Equipped...22 Child Locks SEATS...23 Manual Front Seats...24 Power Adjustment (Front) If Equipped...24 Heated Seats If Equipped...26 Rear Seats...26 HEADRESTRAINTS...28 Front Head Restraints...28 Rear Head Restraints STEERING WHEEL...30 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped..30 MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror...31 Auto Dimming Mirror If Equipped...31 EXTERIORLIGHTS...32 Headlights...32 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) If Equipped...32 High Beams...32 Flash-To-Pass...32 Automatic Lighting If Equipped...33 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If Equipped...33 Parking Lights...33 Headlight Delay...33 Front Fog Lights If Equipped...34 Turn Signals...34 INTERIORLIGHTS...34 Courtesy Lights...34 Cargo Area Lights...35 WIPERS AND WASHERS...35 Front Wiper Operation...36 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped...36 Rear Wiper Operation CLIMATECONTROLS...39 Manual Climate Controls Overview...39 Automatic Climate Control Overview Operating Tips

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WINDOWS...54 Power Window Controls...54 Auto-Down Feature...55 Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection If Equipped...55 Reset Auto-Up...55 Wind Buffeting...55 MY SKY SUN ROOF...56 Removable Roof...56 Power My Sky If Equipped Removing And Installing Panels...56 Bag For Housing Panels If Equipped...60 Emergency Open/Close Wind Buffeting...62 HOOD...62 To Open The Hood...62 To Close The Hood...63 LIFTGATE...63 Opening Closing...64 Cargo Area Features...64 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT...65 Power Outlet...65 Power Inverter If Equipped

15 KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/ STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped. The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob s wireless signal. Key Fob With Remote Control The key fob with Remote Control contains a Remote Keyless Entry feature. The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Key Fobs Keyless Ignition Key Fob 1 Unlock 2 Lock 3 Remote Start 4 Panic 5 Emergency Key To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate. All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in your Owner s Manual at manuals/ for further information. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked. 13

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Request For Additional Key Fobs Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. WARNING! Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF mode. Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment. IGNITION SWITCH Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. The push button ignition has three operating positions. The three positions are OFF, ON, and RUN. If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch. 14

17 START/STOP Ignition Button The push button ignition can be placed in the following positions: OFF The engine is stopped. No electrical devices are available. ON The vehicle is not running. Some electrical devices are available RUN Driving position. All the electrical devices are available. The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened. WARNING! When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could WARNING! operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. For further information, refer to "Starting Procedures," in "Starting And Operating." REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Push the remote start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time shuts the engine off. 15

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To drive the vehicle, push the START/ STOP button to turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode. With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. The vehicle must be started with the key after two consecutive timeouts. SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. CAUTION! The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: The horn will pulse The turn signals will flash The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm: 1. Make sure the vehicle s ignition is placed in the OFF mode. 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open. Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone, refer to "Doors" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner s manual manuals/ 66 for further information. Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone. Push the lock button on the key fob. 3. If any doors are open, close them. To Disarm The System The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods: Push the unlock button on the key fob. 16

19 Grasp the passive entry door handle to unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner s Manual at manuals/ for further information. Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to disarm the system. The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security alarm. The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will sound. When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. DOORS Manual Door Locks To lock each door, rotate the door lock button on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock symbol is no longer visible. If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. Locking/Unlocking Doors From Outside With the doors closed, insert the key blade into the driver exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the right to lock the driver's door. To unlock the driver s door, insert the key blade into the driver exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the left to unlock the driver's door. Manual Door Lock The manual lock knob unlocks each individual door separately. 17

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always make sure the ignition is in OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition in WARNING! the ON or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on each of the front door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors, liftgate and fuel door. The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob s wireless signal and prevent the keyless-go system from starting the vehicle. Power Door Lock Switch The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry system if equipped. refer to Keyless Enter- N-Go Passive Entry located in Doors of Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. 18

21 Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry If Equipped The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in the Owner s Manual on for further information. If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle, and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm will arm. The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob s wireless signal and prevent the keyless-go system from starting the vehicle. To Unlock From The Driver's Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle. To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in your Owner s Manual at for further information. 19

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically. All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting ( Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press ). To Lock The Vehicle s Doors And Liftgate With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle lock button to lock all four doors. Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s). Push The Door Handle Button To Lock DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel. 20

23 Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle: 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob while a door is open. 2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open. 3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open. When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does not find any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer. The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are met: The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs. There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle. To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Electronic Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate release. The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate unlock feature is built into the Electronic Liftgate release. If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in the instrument cluster display, if equipped, only the liftgate will unlock when you push the Electronic Release. If "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic unlock/lock button on the liftgate. For further information, refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Multimedia in your Owner s Manual at for further information. Emergency Unlocking Driver Door If the key fob battery is low or dead, the emergency key can be used to unlock the driver side door lock cylinder. To release the emergency key, proceed as follows: 21

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1. Slide the emergency key release button to the side. 2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob with Remote Control housing. The Emergency Key can be inserted into the door lock cylinder from either direction. WARNING! Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be severely injured or killed. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could start the vehicle, operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior WARNING! heat buildup may cause them to be severely injured or killed Dead Lock Device If Equipped The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that prevents the use of the internal door handles of the vehicle and the power door lock switch. This device prevents the doors from opening within the passenger compartment. Arming The Dead Lock Device The device works on all doors and requires two presses of the lock button on the key fob. The arming of the device is indicated by three flashes of the direction indicators. The device does not operate if one or more doors are not properly closed. Disarming The Device The device will automatically disarm by pushing the unlock button on the key fob. Placing the ignition in the ON or RUN position. Child Locks To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock system. To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. 22

25 Child-Protection Door Lock Function When the child lock system is engaged, the door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the lock/unlock dial to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle. WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked). SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. WARNING! It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 23

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Front Seats Manual Seat Adjustment Levers 1 Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar 2 Seat Height Adjustment Lever 3 Recline Lever WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden move- WARNING! ment of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. Height Adjustment The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height. Manual Recline Adjustment To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever. Power Adjustment (Front) If Equipped The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of the seat, close to the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up/down, forward/rearward, tilt (if equipped) and to set the angle of the seatback. 24

27 Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Switch 2 Power Recline Switch 3 Power Lumbar Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. WARNING! Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving WARNING! could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path. 25

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar Adjustment If Equipped Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. Power seat adjustments are only allowed when the ignition device is turned to ON, and for about 30 minutes after it is turned to OFF. The seats can also be moved after opening/ closing the doors for about 30 minutes, locking or unlocking the doors, or switching on of the front courtesy lights. Heated Seats If Equipped The heated seat switches are located on the instrument panel. You can choose between two heating levels: Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on. Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting on. Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements off. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 145 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approximately 60 minutes. The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. Auto Comfort Systems If Equipped In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, when turning on the vehicle the driver s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F (4.4 C). WARNING! Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low WARNING! temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Rear Seats Split Rear Seats The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat which increases the storage of the rear cargo area. Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be necessary to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold down easily. 26

29 Prior to folding the rear seat, you must secure the rear armrest in up position. You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape. Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area allows you to carry a single passenger on the right side of the rear seat, while the enlargement of the right side allows you to carry two passengers. Proceed as follows: WARNING! It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Rear Seat Release Lever 1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer to Removable Rear Shelf in Cargo Area Features in your Owner s Manual at for further information. 2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints. 3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat and rest them on the seat belt guide. 27

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left or right rear seatback completely forward. Cargo Area Enlargement Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional storage in the rear cargo area. Proceed as follows: 1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints. 2. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat. 3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both sides of the rear seatbacks completely forward. Seatback Repositioning If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position. 1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt guides on the top edge of the seat to ensure the seatbacks properly latch. 2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until they lock on both the latches. Verify the red notches are no longer visible on the release lever. If the red notches are visible, the seatback is not secure. Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 Tilt the head restraint forward and pull the rear armrest tab to release it from the seat and pull forward. The center part of the rear seat can also be used as rear armrest with cupholders. WARNING! Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. HEAD RESTRAINTS Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. WARNING! All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Front Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and passenger head restraints. 28

31 To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. Head Restraint Adjustment Button The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer. WARNING! All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Rear Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head restraints and one center head restraint for its rear passengers. The rear head restraints can be raised or lowered. When the center seat is being occupied, the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. Adjustment Button The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer. 29

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STEERING WHEEL Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. 30 Tilt Steering Wheel Lever To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/telescoping lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel switch has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center of the instrument panel below the radio screen. Auto Comfort Systems If Equipped In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, when turning on the vehicle the heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F (4.4 C). WARNING! Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.

33 WARNING! Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the lever under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the lever under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). Rearview Mirror Adjustment The mirror will automatically release in the event of heavy contact with a passenger. Auto Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the Dimming Mirror This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. 31

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlights The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, side marker lights, daytime running lights, fog lights and the dimming of the instrument cluster and interior lighting. Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument cluster and the controls located on the instrument panel. Daytime Running Lights (DRL) If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when the engine is started and remain on unless the headlights are turned on or the engine is shut off. The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal operation and resume operation when the turn signal operation has ended. High Beams To turn on the high beam headlights, push the turn signal lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) and an indicator will illuminate in the cluster. To turn off the high beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle). High Beam And Turn Signal Controls The headlights must be on for the high beams to activate. Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released. Headlight Switch 32

35 Automatic Lighting If Equipped Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position. When the automatic headlights are enabled, the headlight time delay is active. After the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the headlights will automatically turn off after the time is set by Uconnect Settings. The timing of the headlights is adjustable between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode. Light Sensor The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED, located on the windshield. It detects changes in light intensity outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity of light set by using the menu on the display or on the Uconnect system. The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of external light required for controlling the lighting. Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in the Owner s Manual on manuals/ for further information. Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. Parking Lights From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch to the first detent (parking position) to turn on the parking lights. The parking light indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate. Headlight Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. The time delay of the headlights is programmable between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Headlight Delay Activation To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within two minutes. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off from the Lowbeam position. If the headlight switch is in AUTO position and headlights were on before the ignition is OFF, the delay interval begins automatically. 33

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Headlight Delay Disable The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the parking lights or by placing the ignition in the RUN position. If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on, they will turn off in the normal manner. The lights must be turned off within two minutes of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature. Front Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push the fog light button on the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, push the fog light button on the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch. An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. 34 The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. Cornering Lights The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the turn signal indicator is on. It can be activated through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in the Owner s Manual on for further information. Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the turn signal is turned off. INTERIOR LIGHTS Courtesy Lights Interior Lights Dimmer Switch Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light located in the overhead console, door handle lights, lower instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel. The instrument panel dimmer has two position at the top of the thumb wheel. The first detent position puts the interior lighting into daytime mode and at the very top detent position

37 will illuminate all the interior lights. At the bottom detent position of the of the instrument panel dimmer, the internal backlights to their lowest dimmable setting and disable the interior lights. Front Lights The courtesy lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror. The light switches are used to turn the lights on or off. To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or passenger light switch. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from discharging once the doors are closed. If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off after approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in the OFF position. Vehicles With Retractable Roof For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there are two interior lights located above the grab handles of the rear doors. The lights come on by opening any of the doors. Cargo Area Lights Two interior lights are located in the cargo area on the side trim panels. These lights automatically turn on/off when the liftgate is opened and closed, regardless of the position of the ignition. WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the lever on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. Windshield Wiper Stalk CAUTION! Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the park position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. 35

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Front Wiper Operation Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the two detent positions for intermittent settings, the third detent for low wiper operation and the fourth for high wiper operation. Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off. WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the wind- WARNING! shield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Mist Use this feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle. The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the two detent positions for intermittent settings, to activate this feature. If the end of the multifunction lever rotates from off to the first intermittent setting or from the first intermittent setting to the second intermittent setting, the wipers will perform a round up to clean the windshield. This function can be activated or deactivated by the Uconnect Settings through the radio. Refer to Uconnect Settings in the Multimedia in the Owner s Manual at for further information. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the off position when not using the system. Rain Sensing Wipers Inhibition When the user switches the ignition to OFF, leaving the lever in intermittent positions, no wipe cycle is performed for safety reasons. This temporary inhibition avoids accidental activations of the wiping (e.g during the hand 36

39 washing of the windscreen, blocking the blades in ice/snow conditions). The user can activate the Rain Sensing Wipers in three ways: Moving the level in off position and then in Intermittent positions. One MIST command actuation. The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and the rain sensor detects the presence of rain. The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield. Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance. The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in the Owner s Manual at for further information. Rear Wiper Operation The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the lever on the right side of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever. If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one round up to clean the rear window. Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. If the front wiper is set to Automatic Mode (on the wiper stalk as well as Enabled through Uconnect settings), placing the rear wiper in an intermittent position will cause the front and rear wipers to sync up. Turning the front wipers off will cause the rear wipers to also stop. To use the washer, push the lever forward and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off. As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the lever is released, the pump will resume normal operation. 37

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located with the Climate Controls on the instrument panel. Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. CAUTION! Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 38

41 CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Climate Controls Overview Manual Climate Controls 39

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Climate Control Descriptions Icon Description MAX A/C Setting MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise to the MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. A/C Button Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged. Recirculation Button Push this control button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Front Defrost Mode Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when required. 40

43 Icon Description Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes. Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial counterclockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. Rotating the Temperature Control all the way counterclockwise results in turning on the MAX A/C feature. Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the 0 (OFF) position. Panel Mode Bi-Level Mode Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. The center instrument panel outlets can be adjusted so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 41

44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Floor Mode Mix Mode CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Description Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. CAUTION! Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Rear Window Defrosting Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn the function on/off. Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. The function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes. If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window. CAUTION! To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster heating filaments do not affix stickers or other objects to the inside of the rear glass. 42

45 Air Recirculation Push and release the Air Recirculation button so that the LED is on, to enter recirculation mode. It is recommended to turn the internal air recirculation on while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air. Do not use the function for a long period of time, particularly if there are many passengers in the vehicle, to prevent the windows from misting up. Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach the required heating or cooling conditions quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting. System Maintenance In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on at least once a month for approximately ten minutes. Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer before the summer. The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a (refrigerant) allowed. 43

46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Climate Control Overview Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) 44

47 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions Icon Description MAX A/C Setting MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the driver temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and passenger temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit. A/C Button Push the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON. Pushing the AUTO control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. SYNC Button Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF. The Sync indicator will illuminate when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync mode will automatically exit this feature and return to the separate management of air temperatures in the two zones. Recirculation Button Push to change the current setting. The LED illuminates when ON. When in Max Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will change the setting to normal Defrost mode. This indicates that you can not enter to this mode due to fogging risk. When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is on. AUTO Button If Equipped Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change between manual mode and automatic modes. 45

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Description MAX Defrost Button Push the MAX Defrost button to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change to manual mode. The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on) when MAX Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning compressor is turned on (LED on), both driver and passenger temperature controls are set to (HI), defrost mode is selected (LED on), rear defroster is turned on (LED on) and the air recirculation is turned off (LED off). If the MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the climate system will return to the previous setting. Rear Defrost Button Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes. Passenger Temperature Knob Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set desired temperature shown in the Temperature Display. The set temperature is shown on the display. Turning the control knob completely in one direction or the other activates the HI (maximum heating) or LO (maximum cooling) functions shown in the display, respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature. Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync. Blower Control Knob Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower will cause the automatic mode to change to manual operation. The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower Control adjustment knob. 46

49 Icon Windshield Mode Description Windshield Mode Air comes from the outlets directed at the windshield meant for defrosting, and side window demisting. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. Panel Mode Floor Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode is obtained by pressing both the Panel Mode button and the Floor Mode button, activating them both. Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. 47

50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Mix Mode CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel Description Mix Mode Mix Mode is obtained by pressing both the Windshield Mode button and the Floor Mode button, activating them both. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Climate Control Power Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off. Driver Temperature Knob Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set desired temperature shown in the Temperature Display. Rotate fully counterclockwise for maximum A/C (LO). The set temperature is shown on the display. Turning the control knob completely in one direction or the other activates the HI (maximum heating) or LO (maximum cooling) functions shown in the display, respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature. CAUTION! to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Climate Control System Compressor Push the A/C Control button to activate/ deactivate the compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the button turning on). The system remembers that the compressor has been turned off, even after the engine has stopped. 48

51 Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO MODE (AUTO LED will turn off). To restore automatic control of compressor, push the AUTO button again. With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Under certain environmental conditions, windows could fog rapidly since the air is not dehumidified. MAX A/C MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the driver temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and passenger temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit. Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost Function) Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED on) the windshield and side window demisting function. The Climate Control system carries out the following operations: Turns on the air conditioning compressor when environmental conditions are suitable. Turns air recirculation off. Sets blower fan to the maximum speed. Directs air flow to windshield and front side window diffusers. Activates the heated rear window defrost. Activates the heated windshield (if equipped). Displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED illuminated). When the function is activated, the AUTO button LED turns off. With the function activated, the only possible manual adjustments are pushing the A/C control button, adjusting the fan speed and turning the heated rear window off. When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons are pushed, the Climate Control system will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function. Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield distribution activates the Climate Control system compressor and the air recirculation is set to outside air intake. This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows. Max-defrost is also available in manual mode. Rear Window Defrosting Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn the function on/off. Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. The function is automati- 49

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE cally deactivated after 20 minutes. If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window. CAUTION! To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster heating filaments do not affix stickers or other objects to the inside of the rear glass. Turning Off The Climate Control System Push the ON/OFF button. With the Climate Control system off: Air recirculation is on, isolating the passenger compartment from the outside. The A/C compressor is off. The blower is off. The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated. 50 The Climate Control unit stores the temperatures set before the system was turned off and restores them when one of the following knobs/buttons is pushed: A/C Recirculation Max Defrost Blower Increase AUTO To restart the Climate Control system in fully automatic mode, push the AUTO button. System Maintenance In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on at least once a month for approximately ten minutes. Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership before the summer. The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a (refrigerant) allowed. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If Equipped Automatic Operation 1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC panel and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC display, along with two temperatures for the driver and front passenger. The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow. 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, and passenger temperatures. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

53 It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the front blower knob setting. Manual Operation Override This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode. The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass. Operating Tips Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions. Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging. Vacation/Storage Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur. 51

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. Cabin Air Filter The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed. 52

55 Operating Tips Chart 53

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WINDOWS Power Window Controls The power window switch is located on the driver s door panel. The driver s power window switch controls the operation of all the windows. Power Window Switches 1 Window Lockout Switch (Rear Doors) 2 Opening/Closing Left/Right Rear Window (If Equipped) 3 Opening/Closing Left/Right Front Window There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ON or RUN position. For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power window switches will remain active for up to three minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the win- 54

57 WARNING! dows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Auto-Down Feature The driver door power window switch and the passenger door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch down, for a short period of time, and release and the window will go down automatically. To open the window part way, push the window switch down briefly and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection If Equipped If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually. WARNING! There is no auto-reverse protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing. Reset Auto-Up Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up: 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to 55

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. MY SKY SUN ROOF Removable Roof The roof consists of front and rear panels that can be removed independently. On some vehicles the front panel can be power operated. Refer to Power My Sky in this section. CAUTION! The panels are able to withstand the snow. However, it is recommended that you remove excessive layers of snow that have accumulated or damage to the panels may occur. Power My Sky If Equipped Open/Close The Front Panel The power My Sky switches are located on the overhead console. The switches are used to open and close the front panel. To retract the front panel to the open position, push the open/close button. From the fully open position, pull the open/ close switch: the front panel will close completely. Venting The Front Panel To vent the front panel push and release the vent switch. During the vent operation any push on the open/close switch will stop the closing of the panel. If the My Sky is in open position, the vent switch must be held until the panel vents. Auto-Reverse Feature The front panel of the retractable roof is equipped with a auto-reverse safety system that is able to detect the presence of an obstacle during the opening and closing motion of the panel. When this event occurs, the front panel stops and reverses immediately. With both panels removed the retractable roof cannot be opened or closed. Removing And Installing Panels Remove the panels only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear panel can be removed only when the front panel is completely closed or removed. Removing Panels 1. Front panel must be in the closed position to remove panels. 56

59 My Sky Key Location Latch Key Hole Rotating My Sky Key 2. Locate the My Sky Key inside the panel storage bag in the cargo area. 3. From inside of the passenger compartment, insert the My Sky Key into the latch key hole. 4. Rotate and keep the key turned to the symbol to release the lock. 57

60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Unlocking Panel Handle 5. Pull the panel handle down and away from the stowed position, unlocking the panel. Removing Key 6. Remove the key from the latch key hole. 7. Push panel up and away from latch to create a small gap. Removing Front Panel 8. Remove the panel from the outside of the vehicle. 9. Place the panel inside of the provided bag for storage in the cargo area. Repeat the process for the rear panel. Push Panel Up An air deflector is available on the Jeep accessory line. This deflector may be used to avoid the wind buffeting inside the vehicle, if the front panel is removed. 58

61 Installing Panel Rear panel must be installed before the front panel. Front Guide Tabs 3. Align the colored guide tabs to ensure the panel(s) close properly. Front panel is labeled with yellow guide tabs. Rear panel is labeled with blue guide tabs. Closing Panel Handle 4. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle down and toward the stowed position, locking it into place. Installing Rear Panel 1. From outside the vehicle, place the panel on the slides. 2. Gently slide the front panel forward, or the rear panel backwards. 59

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Push To Lock Panel 5. Make sure that the panel has been properly refitted. From inside the passenger compartment, push upward on the panel from the bottom, in order to verify that it is properly latched to the clamping locks. Bag For Housing Panels If Equipped Roof Panel Bag After the panels have been removed, store the roof panels inside of the bag located inside the storage compartment. It is recommended to do this procedure outside of the vehicle. For proper housing, proceed as follows: Panel Dividers 1. Open the Roof Panel Bag and lift the panel dividers toward the outside. 60

63 First Panel In Storage Bag Second Panel In Storage Bag Tie-Down Straps 2. Place the front panel into the bag and fold the panel dividers down. 3. Place the rear panel into the bag on top of dividers. 4. Close the bag and place it on the inside the cargo area. 5. Open the Velcro straps provided on the bag. Anchor them firmly at the tie-down hooks located in the cargo area. Do not load objects that weigh over 165 pounds (75 kg) on top of the Roof Panel Bag. The bag is washable. Refer to the documentation that is supplied with the bag. 61

64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Emergency Open/Close If the Power My Sky switch fails, the retractable roof can be operated manually as follows: 1. Remove the protective cap located on the inner lining. 2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that is supplied in the tool bag in the cargo area. 3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the key hole and turn it clockwise to open the roof or counter-clockwise to close. CAUTION! When refitting panels, be careful to avoid fingers, scarves, ties and items of clothing from getting caught under the panels themselves. Do not open the roof in the presence of snow or ice. There is risk of damage. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. HOOD To Open The Hood Two latches must be released to open the hood. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver s side of the instrument panel. 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety latch release lever toward the passenger side of the vehicle. The hood release lever is located behind the center front edge of the hood. Hood Release Lever Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert it into the seat located on the underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is locked into position. 62

65 To Close The Hood Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the other hand, remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert it into the locking tab. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop. Make sure that the hood is completely closed. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully CAUTION! closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. LIFTGATE Opening To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the power door lock switches located on the driver door handle. To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the Electronic Liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the Liftgate, push the Electronic Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. Passive Entry Liftgate Handle Location Emergency Opening Proceed as follows: 1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). 2. Fold the rear seats forward. 3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under cargo floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab. 4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab slot to trigger the release tab of the liftgate. 63

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Closing Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate reaches self closing position. Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked. To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle release will lock the vehicle. The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. Cargo Area Features Cargo Load Floor The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can be adjusted as needed. 64 Position 1 (Lowered Position): This position allows you to make the load floor flat for ease of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area. This position also makes it possible to use the space below as another compartment for storing fragile or smaller objects. Position 2 (Elevated Position): When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat is folded flat, it will allow for loading objects of long dimensions. It is recommended to use this position only during the actual transporting of the objects, then bring the load floor in position 1. Table Tilt Load In addition to the two positions described above, the load floor can also be placed in a tilted position (slanted toward the rear seatbacks as to ease the access to the underlying zone of the luggage compartment (e.g. to pick up the spare tire or the Tire Service Kit). Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the supports 1 and 2 on the sides of the cargo area. The load floor provides securing of any cargo inside this position, so that the cargo will slide in the case of sudden braking. Access To The Loading Floor To access the double load compartment, proceed as follows: 1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle. 2. Place the desired objects inside the compartment. 3. Reposition the load floor. CAUTION! The load floor must be arranged in a central position with respect to cargo area. Displacement Load Floor To position the load from the lower to the upper position, proceed as follows: 1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the load floor. 2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel guides and on the rear cross member.

67 Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and container carrier, proceed as follows: 1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove the floor. 2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet. Anchoring Of The Load The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor, should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving. The side panels may be equipped with three grocery hooks (one on the left side and two on the right side) for securing loads that are not excessively heavy. INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Power Outlet There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets in this vehicle, one located under the HVAC controls and one located in the drivers side rear cargo area. These power outlets can power mobile phones, electronics and other low power devices. This power outlet is located in front of the gear selector. This power outlet is located in the drivers side rear cargo area. Rear Cargo Power Outlet Front Power Outlet Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. 65

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your new vehicle warranty. Engine Compartment Fuses F18 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Cargo Power Outlet. Body Computer Fuses F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel Power Outlet. Power Inverter If Equipped Power Inverter There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter outlet located on the back of the center console. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged. 66

69 The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter. WARNING! To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT: insert any objects into the receptacles touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. 67

70 68

71 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.71 Instrument Cluster Display Controls...71 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items.72 Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items...75 TRIP COMPUTER...75 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES...76 Red Telltale Lights...76 Yellow Telltale Lights...79 Green Telltale Lights...84 Blue Telltale Lights...84 White Telltale Lights...84 Gray Telltale Lights...85 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBDII)...85 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity...85 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1 Tachometer 2 Temperature Gauge 3 Instrument Cluster Display 4 Fuel Gauge 5 Speedometer Instrument Cluster 70

73 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments. Instrument Cluster Display Controls Instrument Cluster Display Controls 1 Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through Menus And Submenus 2 Arrow Right/Left Access Information/Submenu Screens 3 OK Button For Selecting And Resetting Information The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows the driver to select vehicle information and Personal Settings. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items for further information. Push the up arrow button to scroll upward through the main menus and submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Messages, Screen Set Up). Push the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Messages, Screen Set Up). Push the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push the back/left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. 71

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset. Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items The instrument cluster display menu items display in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle features. Vehicle Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until "Vehicle Info" is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the right or left arrow button to scroll through the following information displays: Tire Pressure View the information relating to the TPMS system (If Equipped). Coolant Temperature View the engine coolant temperature. 72 Trans Temperature View the trans oil temperature. Battery Voltage View the voltage value (state of charge) of the battery. Service If Equipped View the service status message(s). Fuel Economy This menu item allows you to set the unit of measurement for the "Fuel Economy and Range." Range (Miles or km) Current Consumption (mpg or L/100km or km/l) Average Consumption (mpg or L/100km or km/l) Reset procedure shown at the bottom of the display. Audio Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Trip Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following: Distance Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/l) of Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset. Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

75 Screen Setup This menu item allows you to change the position of the information on the display. Display Gears (Vehicles With Reconfigurable Multi-Functional Display And Automatic Transmission) By selecting this item, you can select the display mode, the particulars relating to the automatic transmission, and choose between the following options: "Single digit" The right side of the display will show the letter concerning the automatic transmission gear selector (P,R,N or D) position. After approximately two seconds, the letter will be displayed in a central position. "Full PRND" (Default): The right side of the display the letters PRND, the position assumed by the gear selector will be highlighted in the display. During the operation in sequential mode ("AutoStick"), in place of the letter D, the gear will be will be displayed. In The Upper-Left/Top Right The information relating to the following can be displayed: External temperature Ignition Button If Equipped Compass If Equipped Date (Month/Day) Time (Hours/Minutes) In the central area of the display, you can view all of the information listed above as well as the following: Compass If Equipped Speed Display If Equipped Date (Day/Month/Year) Time Compass If Equipped Ignition Button If Equipped External Temp If equipped Menu Item Distance Traveled A (Trip A) Distance Traveled B (Trip B) Restore Default Settings Selecting this item, and you can reset and restore the default settings. Settings This menu item allows you to change the settings for the following: Display Units Clock and Date Security Safety and Assistance Lights Doors and Locks Vehicles Equipped With Multifunctional Display Reconfigurable: The following menu/submenu items are available in the cluster display. Display By selecting the "Display," you can access the following settings: Language: allows you to select the language in which to display the information/warnings. 73

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL "Units Of Measure" By selecting the item "Units of Measure," you can select the unit of measure to use for displaying various magnitudes. Possible options are: US Metric Custom Imperial "Clock & Data" By selecting the item, "Clock & Date" you can adjust the clock. Possible options are: Set Time: adjust hours/minutes Set Format: adjust the time format "12h" (12 hours) or " 24h" (24 hours) Set Date: adjust day/month/year Security By selecting the item Security, you can make the following adjustments: Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is notified through a visual and acoustic signaling (display of a message and a symbol on the display). When the speed warning is set, the icon should remain visualized for the same duration time of the pop up. If the driver exceeded the speed set the icon should remain for however long the vehicle is over the set speed. Driver may also turn the Speed Warning OFF should you choose not to use this feature. Seat Belt Reminder: This function is only viewable when the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active. Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist system. Passenger Air Bag If Equipped Front passenger air bag may be enabled or disabled. "Lights" By selecting the item "Lights," you can make the following adjustments: Headlight Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff after engine shutoff Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of headlight brightness Daytime Running Lights: activate/ deactivate the daytime running lights Cornering lights: activate/deactivate the cornering lights (If Equipped) Interior Ambient lights: adjust the level of interior ambient lights Greeting Lights: activate / deactivate greeting lights "Doors & Locks" By selecting the item "Doors & Locks," you can make the following adjustments: Auto Door Lock: activate/deactivate the automatic locking of the doors with the vehicle moving Auto Unlock On Exit: automatic unlocking of the doors when exiting the vehicle 74

77 Flash Light with Lock: activate the direction indicators when closing the doors Sound Horn With Lock: activate/ deactivate the horn when pushing the LOCK button on the key fob. The options are "Off," "First Press, and "Second Press" Horn With Remote Start: activate/ deactivate the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine with the key fob Remote Door Unlock: allows you to open the driver door only on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the key fob Passive Entry (If Equipped) : activate the automatic locking of the doors Compass By selecting the item Compass you can make the following adjustments: Compass Calibration Compass Variance Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items The instrument cluster display can be used to view the following main menu items: Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. Speedometer Stop & Start If Equipped Vehicle Info Audio Driver Assist Messages Fuel Economy Screen Setup Trip Settings Refer to your Owner's Manual on for further information. TRIP COMPUTER The Trip computer is used to display information on car operation when the key is turned to the RUN position. This function allows you to define two separate trips called Trip A and Trip B where the car's "complete trips" are monitored in an independent manner. Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new trip). To perform a reset, push and hold the OK button on the steering wheel controls. Trip A and Trip B are used to display the figures relating to: Distance Travelled Average Consumption Travel Time (driving time) Quantities Displayed Distance Travelled Indicates the distance travelled by the start of the new trip. 75

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Average Consumption Represents the average fuel consumption since the start of the new trip. Travel Time Elapsed time since the start of the new trip. OK Button Short Push Of The Button: display of various parameters. Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and begin a new trip. New trip Starts after reset: "Manual" by pushing the OK button. "Automatic" when the "distance" reaches the value is ( km) or when the "time travel" reaches the value of (999 hours and 59 minutes). After each disconnection and reconnection of the battery. 76 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. Red Telltale Lights Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

79 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the STOP/OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Vehicle Security Light This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. 77

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Oil Pressure Fail Warning Light This light indicates that the oil pressure sensor has failed. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates vehicle oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. 78 Battery Charge Warning Light This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component. If jump starting is required, refer to Jump- Starting in In Case Of Emergency. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in In Case Of Emergency for further information. Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light This warning light indicates that there is a fault in your vehicle s Electric Power Steering system. If the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers. See your authorized dealer for service. Door Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed. If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. Hood Open Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed.

81 Liftgate Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is left open and not fully closed. Transmission Fault Warning Light If Equipped This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle under power, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine vehicle under power, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Yellow Telltale Lights Automatic Headlight Fail This light illuminates when there is a failure of the automatic headlights. If this light illuminates, have it inspected at an authorized dealer. Rain Sensor Failure This light illuminates when the rain sensor fails. If this light illuminates, have an authorized dealer inspect it. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go 79

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL out when the engine is running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. This telltale indicates that an ESC event is active. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. Electronic Park Brake Fail Light This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership. Fuel Level Sensor Failure This light illuminates when there is a fuel level sensor failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it. Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light If Equipped This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off. Forward Collision Indicator Light If Equipped This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. Forward Collision OFF Warning (FCW) Light This warning light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off. Icy Road Condition Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate during an icy road condition. Keyless System Failure This light illuminates when there is a keyless system failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it. Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately gal(5 7 L)this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added. 80

83 LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation. The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation. Refer to LaneSense If Equipped" in Starting And Operating for further information. LaneSense Failure Indicator Light If Equipped This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see your authorized dealer. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer. Malfunction Warning Light The vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors emissions control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before vehicle start up. If the bulb does not come on when placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after vehicle start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the vehicle is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/ Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. 81

84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. CAUTION! Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the 82 vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

85 CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. Audio System Failure Light If Equipped The telltale illuminates to report a failure of the Audio System. Contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible. Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs. Side Distance Warning If Equipped This light indicates a side distance warning. Towing Hook Breakdown Light If Equipped This light illuminates when there is a failure with the tow hook. Contact your authorized dealer for service. Transmission Temperature Indicator Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off. WARNING! If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. CAUTION! Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. Vehicle Security Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm system has detected an attempt was made to break into the vehicle. Wait To Start Light If Equipped The Wait To Start telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is turned to the RUN position. It s duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until 83

86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL telltale is no longer displayed. Refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information. The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is warm enough. Green Telltale Lights Automatic High Beam Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator shows that the automatic high beam headlights are on. Cruise Control Set Indicator Light If Equipped This light will turn on when the Speed Control is SET. Refer to Speed Control If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. 84 Hazard Warning Lights The hazard warning indicators light up when the vehicles Hazard Warning flasher switch has been pushed. Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Turn Signal Warning Lights The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right). A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. Stop/Start Active Indicator Light If Equipped This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/ Start function is in Autostop mode. Blue Telltale Lights High Beam Indicator Light This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario. White Telltale Lights Cruise Control ON Indicator This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set. Light Sensor Failure This light illuminates when there is light sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have an authorized dealer inspect it. Set Speed Warning Light If Equipped When Set Speed Warning is turned on the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster, with a number matching

87 the set speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, an audible chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster will also change from white to yellow, and a pop up warning message will pop up on the instrument cluster display screen. Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display, for further information refer to Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel. The number 120 is only an example of a speed that can be set. Gray Telltale Lights Cruise Control Cancelled Light This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to Speed Control If Equipped in Starting and Operating for further information. ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel CAUTION! economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system. WARNING! ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II 85

88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle. If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may: Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information. For further information, refer to Privacy Practices and Uconnect CyberSecurity in All About Uconnect Access in your Owner s Manual Radio Supplement and Cybersecurity in Multimedia in your Owner s information at manuals/. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. 86

89 The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. 87

90 88

91 SAFETY SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)...90 Electronic Brake Control System...91 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS..99 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) If Equipped...99 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation If Equipped Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Occupant Restraint Systems Features Important Safety Precautions Seat Belt Systems Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Child Restraints Transporting Pets SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers Exhaust Gas Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

92 SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). You also may experience the following when ABS activates: The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop). The clicking sound of solenoid valves. Brake pedal pulsations. A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS. WARNING! The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the WARNING! condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others. ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light The yellow Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is 90

93 required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. Electronic Brake Control System Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), and Hill Descent Control (HDC). Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not pump the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive WARNING! speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied. The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate: The vehicle must be stopped. 91

94 SAFETY The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate) grade or greater hill. The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the HSA will work in RE- VERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK. WARNING! There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of WARNING! your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) If Equipped TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting And Operating for further information. When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode. WARNING! If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the 92

95 intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. WARNING! Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it WARNING! increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others. Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC WARNING! performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. ESC Operation Modes To disable ESC and other safety systems, follow the instruction below. There are three modes of active safety systems present on the vehicle: ESC On Partial Off Full Off ESC On Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range This is the normal operating mode for ESC when operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal mode for operating a fourwheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH 93

96 SAFETY range. The ESC system will be in ESC On mode whenever the vehicle is started or the power transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW range. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons as noted. Refer to Partial Off and to Full Off for additional information. It is recommended to select the mode "Partial Off" or "Full Off" only for specific reasons. Partial Off Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range The Partial Off mode is intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows. ESC OFF Button To enter the Partial Off mode, momentarily push the ESC Off button and the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light will turn off. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation. To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pushing the ESC Off button. Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the ESC Off button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING! When in Partial Off mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in Partial Off mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode. 94

97 Full Off Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High And 4WD Low Range The Full Off mode is intended for offhighway and off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. The ESC Off button is located in the lower switch bank above the climate control panel. To enter Full Off mode, push and hold the ESC Off button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate and an ESC Off message will appear in the odometer. In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section) until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically switches to Partial Off mode, described above. When the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system will return to Full Off mode. The ESC OFF indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC Off button. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation. With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. Full Off mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road use. Full Off is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW range. The ESC OFF message will display and a chime will sound when the gear selector is moved from any position to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was cleared previously. Selec-Terrain If Equipped On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the activation of some driving modes provide partial off or full off of some active safety systems in order to optimize performance in specific modes. Partial or full off of the active safety systems will be indicated by a light in the instrument cluster. In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety systems are partially disabled and put in place to ensure maximum performance in the specific mode of operation. However, you can reactivate them completely at any time by pushing the ESC button. In 4WD LOW, the active safety systems are completely bypassed in order to ensure maximum off-road performance. 95

98 SAFETY ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when Traction Control System is active. If the ESC Activation/ 96 Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or full off. The ESC OFF switch is located in the center console. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles. ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in Full Off mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

99 WARNING! Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or the Full Off mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in this section for further information. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system with the electric power steering to increase the safety level of the whole car. In critical situations (understeering, oversteering, braking with different grip conditions), through the DST function the ESC system controls the steering to implement an additional torque contribution on the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver to the driver. The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases the safety and car control feeling. The DST is a driving aid system and does not replace the driver s actions while driving the car. Hill Descent Control (HDC) If Equipped Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk) HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. HDC has three states: 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate). 97

100 SAFETY 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application). 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed). Enabling HDC HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC: Driveline is in 4WD Low Range. Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h). Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released. Driver s door is closed. Activating HDC Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver and can be adjusted using brake and throttle input. Driver Override: The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at anytime. Deactivating HDC HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur: Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application. Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h). Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade. Vehicle is shifted to PARK. Disabling HDC HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following conditions occur: The driver pushes the HDC switch. The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range. Driver s door opens. The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.) Feedback To The Driver: The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in. The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC. The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch when enable conditions have not been met. The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position. WARNING! HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. 98

101 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) If Equipped The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK. The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is necessary to deactivate BSM system manually by settings menu to avoid a misdetection. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in your Owner s Manual at for further information. The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the radar sensors located on the rear fascia with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle. Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h). Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light 99

102 SAFETY will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (25 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes. WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Rear Cross Path (RCP) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 mph (2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in RE- VERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING! Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in your Owner s Manual at manuals/ for further information. 100

103 Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/ Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted. Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted. When the system is in RCP, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime. Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off, there will be a related message on instrument cluster display. If BSM system is off, this message will be visualized every time the vehicle is restarted. The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used. Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings Sensor Blinded In the case of a sensor blinded: BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously. A instrument cluster dedicated message will display. The rear bumper must be clean and free of any obstructing debris. System Not Available In the case of the system being temporary unavailable: BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously. A instrument cluster dedicated message will display. 101

104 SAFETY In the case of the system being completely unavailable: A chime will turn on. A instrument cluster dedicated message will display. Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized dealer for service. General Information This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. The device may not cause harmful interference. 2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 102 Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation If Equipped The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the end of the intervention of automatic braking, the engine could stall, unless the driver can depress the clutch pedal. Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the end of the intervention of automatic braking, the transmission may remain in last gear stored: therefore the vehicle could lurch forward, once the brakes release a few seconds later. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.

105 If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes. When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated. The minimum speed for FCW activation is 4 mph (7 km/h). The maximum speed for FCW activation is 124 mph (200 km/h). The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, the FCW system will be automatically deactivated. The active braking is enabled only if the front seat belts are fastened. The active braking is disabled when a trailer is connected with a Mopar Trailer Towing system. If the vehicle is equipped with an aftermarket system, it is recommended that the Active Braking is turned off manually. WARNING! Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. Turning FCW On And Off The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the Uconnect settings. The default status of FCW is Warning + Active Braking, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and enable the active braking. Changing the FCW status to off deactivates the system, so no warning or active braking will be available in case of a possible collision Changing the FCW status to Only warning prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual warnings. 103

106 SAFETY Changing the status of the system is only possible with the vehicle at a complete stop. The FCW system state is not kept in memory from one ignition position to the next. If the system is turned off, it will turn on when the vehicle is restarted. Changing FCW Sensitivity By changing the settings on the menu of the Uconnect system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by choosing one of the following three options: "Near", "Medium" or "Far". The default option is "Medium". This setting provides that the system notify the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is at a standard distance, intermediate between the other two possible settings. By setting the sensitivity of the system to "Far", the system will warn the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle in front when the latter is at a greater distance, giving you the chance to act on the brakes in a more 104 limited and gradual. This setting gives the driver the maximum possible time of reaction to prevent a possible accident. By changing the option to "Near", the system will warn the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting offers a reaction time to the driver lower than the settings "Medium" and "Far", in the case of a potential accident, while a more dynamic driving of the vehicle. The setting of the sensitivity of the system is maintained in memory when the engine is switched off. FCW Limited Warning If the instrument cluster display reads FCW Limited Functionality or FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front Windshield momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. Service FCW Warning If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display reads: FCW Unavailable Service Required This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will read FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked and the system will deactivate.

107 The FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the lower grille. In absence of visible obstructions on the bumper, it could be necessary to wipe off the radar directly on the surface, after having the radar cover removed. It s recommended that your authorized dealer perform this operation. If the FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer. Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit FCW operation. Precautions While Driving With FCW In certain driving conditions, such as: Driving in the vicinity of a curve Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane Lane changing of other vehicles Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection The intervention of the system could be unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular attention, while maintaining control of the vehicle to drive in complete safety. Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could detect the presence of a vehicle that is in front of the vehicle, but that does not preside in the same lane. In cases such as this, the system might respond. Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane The system is not able to detect the presence of vehicles that are in front of the vehicle but placed outside the field of action of the radar sensor and could therefore not react in the presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or motorcycles. Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while standing in the traffic lane of their vehicle and inside the field of action of the radar sensor may cause the intervention of the system. Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an oncoming intersection. General Information This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/

108 SAFETY Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. The device may not cause harmful interference. 2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kpa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three 106 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kpa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kpa). If the ambient temperature is 68 F (20 C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kpa), a temperature drop to 20 F (-7 C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kpa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kpa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still

109 be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value. When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kpa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall system performance. CAUTION! Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure TPMS feature operation. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor. The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability. The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Seasonal temperature changes will affect TPMS information on your instrument cluster. Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. 107

110 SAFETY It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: Receiver Module. Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the instrument cluster, an "Inflate to XX" message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, 108 and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kpa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Service TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. Using tire chains on the vehicle. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-matching Full Size Spare 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the spare tire. 2. If you install the compact or nonmatching full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will

111 sound and the TPMS Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE and "Inflate to XX" messages will turn on upon the next ignition cycle. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or nonmatching full size spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Tire Pressure Monitor System Operation The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: Receiver Module. Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the instrument cluster. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. 109

112 SAFETY Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in 110 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning the instrument cluster will return to their original color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kpa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Service TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash, and the SERVICE TPM SYS- TEM message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. Using tire chains on the vehicle. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will

113 turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a Tire Low message, an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value in a different color. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) the TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. 4. The instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in the same color as the other pressure values in place of the different color low tire pressure value. The instrument cluster will also display a SPARE LOW PRES- SURE message to remind you to service the flat tire. Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size Spare 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the compact or nonmatching full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a different color pressure value and an "Inflate to XX" message. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or nonmatching full size, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 111

114 SAFETY (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: Occupant Restraint Systems Features Seat Belt Systems Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags Child Restraints Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. 112 Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (refer to Child Restraints in this section for further information). 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to Child Restraints in this section for further information) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the Customer Assistance section for customer service contact information.

115 WARNING! Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) Driver And Passenger BeltAlert If Equipped BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. 113

116 SAFETY Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. WARNING! Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to WARNING! restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seat- 114

117 WARNING! ing position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. WARNING! A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. WARNING! Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause WARNING! internal injuries. Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in 115

118 SAFETY the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 1 Seat Belt Buckle 2 Seat Belt Latch Plate 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. 116

119 Adjustable Upper Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position. WARNING! Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. 117

120 SAFETY Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position. ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of 118

121 webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. WARNING! Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly WARNING! when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. 119

122 SAFETY The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components: Air Bag System Components Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Track Position Sensors Seat Belt Buckle Switch 120 Air Bag Warning Light The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/ RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ ON/RUN position. The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

123 WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel section of this manual. Front Air Bags This vehicle has front air bags and lap/ shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 Driver Knee Impact Bolster/ Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag 121

124 SAFETY WARNING! Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. WARNING! Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. 122 WARNING! No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. Front Air Bag Operation Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including

125 some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. WARNING! Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags. Supplemental Side Air Bags Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags: 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side im- 123

126 SAFETY pacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

127 The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. WARNING! Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your pro- WARNING! tection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. WARNING! Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won t WARNING! deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Side Impacts In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger com- 125

128 SAFETY partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. Rollover Events Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. 126 The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: Air Bag System Components Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Track Position Sensors Seat Belt Buckle Switch If A Deployment Occurs The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

129 continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer s instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: Cut off fuel to the engine. Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button. Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System. Unlock the power door locks. Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater If Equipped. Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor. Close the HVAC Circulation Door. Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure. 127

130 SAFETY Customer Action Customer Will See Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition MAR/ ACC/ON/RUN. 3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. 4. Place turn signal in neutral state. 5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. 6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is OFF. Customer Action Customer Will See Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. 8. Place turn signal in neutral state. 9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. 10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light is OFF. Customer Action Customer Will See Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated). Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually). System is now reset and the engine may be started. If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air 128

131 WARNING! bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be WARNING! used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. 129

132 SAFETY Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. For additional information, refer to or call: Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information: motorvehiclesafety/ safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm 130

133 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forwardfacing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Infant And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. 131

134 SAFETY Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with a seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone: 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child s thighs and not their stomach? 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? 132

135 If the answer to any of these questions was no, then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a WARNING! crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. Restraint Type Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) LATCH Lower Anchors Only X Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An X Below Seat Belt Only LATCH Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor X X Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X 133

136 SAFETY Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System ing position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle LATCH Label Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seat- LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 134

137 What is the weight limit (child s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorage? Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Can the head restraints be removed? Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg) No No No Yes Yes Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner s manual for more information. The head restraints may be removed in every rear seating position. 135

138 SAFETY Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. Lower Anchors Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat. Tether Anchors LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH WARNING! Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to To Install A LATCH- Compatible Child Restraint for typical installation instructions. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. 136

139 To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position. 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for 137

140 SAFETY WARNING! attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING! Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description in Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) under Occupant Restraint Systems for additional information on ALR. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 138

141 What is the weight limit (child s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts Weight limit of the Child Restraint Yes Yes No Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. The head restraintscan be removed in each seating position. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING! Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. WARNING! Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 139

142 SAFETY 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage: WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rearfacing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) WARNING! Restraint System for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and 140

143 where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions. Rear Seat Tether Anchors WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers Never transport passengers in the cargo area. WARNING! Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 141

144 SAFETY Exhaust Gas WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. 142 The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. Air Bag Warning Light The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to Occupant Restraints in Safety for further information.

145 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. WARNING! An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: WARNING! ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle. ONLY use the driver s side floor mat on the driver s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes WARNING! with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk. ONLY use the passenger s side floor mat on the passenger s side floor area. ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver s side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control. NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelera- 143

146 SAFETY WARNING! tor, brake, or clutch pedals then reinstall the floor mats. It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. 144

147 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE Stopping The Engine ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)..147 Auto Park Brake SafeHold Brake Service Mode MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting Downshifting NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Gear Selector Gear Ranges Transmission Limp Home Mode Ignition Park Interlock Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System SPEEDCONTROL Activation Setting A Desired Speed Varying The Speed Accelerating For Passing Resume Speed Deactivation REARPARKSENSE Rear ParkSense Sensors Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense Service The Rear ParkSense System ParkSense System Usage Precautions..162 LANESENSE LaneSense Operation Turning LaneSense On Or Off LaneSense Warning Message Changing LaneSense Status REARBACKUPCAMERA FOURWHEELDRIVE Four Wheel Drive (4x4) SELEC-TERRAIN Mode Selection Guide ADDING FUEL TRAILER TOWING Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Trailer And Tongue Weight RECREATIONAL TOWING Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Recreational Towing

148 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING! Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range. Manual Transmission Proceed as follows: 1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear selector in the NEUTRAL position. 2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, without pressing the accelerator. 3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it as soon as the engine is started. 4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the OFF mode and wait seconds before attempting to restart the engine. Automatic Transmission Proceed as follows: 1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear selector in the PARK or NEU- TRAL position. 2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the accelerator. 3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it as soon as the engine is started. 4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the OFF mode and wait seconds before attempting to restart the engine. Stopping The Engine To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or push the START/ STOP button three times consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the ignition will be placed in the RUN position. Turning OFF the car (cycle the ignition from the RUN mode to the OFF mode), the power supply to the accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes. Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place the ignition to OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the window switches remains active for three minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this function. 146

149 After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the temperature inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting off the engine. ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) Your vehicle is equipped with a new Electric Park Brake System (EPB) that offers greater convenience. The EPB switch is located in the center console. Park Brake Switch To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch momentarily. The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch must be in RUN. Then put your foot on the brake pedal and push the park brake switch down momentarily. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp and the switch indicator will extinguish. The park brake can also be automatically released. With the engine running and the transmission in gear, release the brake pedal and depress the throttle pedal. For safety reasons, your seat belt must also be fastened. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages or disengages. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you are engaging or disengaging the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The new Auto Park Brake feature can be used to apply the park brake automatically every time you park the vehicle. Auto Park Brake can be enabled and disabled in the Settings menu in Uconnect or in Safe Hold conditions. The parking brake can be engaged even when the ignition is OFF, however, it can only be disengaged when the ignition is in the RUN mode. Safehold is a new feature that will automatically apply the park brake under certain conditions. The EPB monitors the status of the driver s seat belt, driver s door and pedal positions to determine if the driver may have exited while the vehicle is still capable of moving and will then automatically apply the park brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling. The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch. 147

150 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to Electric Park Brake (EPB) in Starting And Operating located in the vehicle s Owner's Manual at for further details. CAUTION! If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. WARNING! When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking WARNING! brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. Auto Park Brake The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a manual transmission, whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection through the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Settings. Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmission) and the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some cases, with an automatic transmission, if at the cycle of key from RUN to the OFF mode the gear selector is not firmly locked in Parking position, EPB applies automatically even if Auto Park Brake has been previously disabled. SafeHold SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition is in the RUN mode. For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met: Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). 148

151 There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. The seat belt is unbuckled. The driver door is open. The vehicle is not in the PARK position. For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met: Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. The clutch pedal is not pressed. The seat belt is unbuckled. The driver door is open. SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door is open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF mode and back to RUN again. Brake Service Mode We recommend having your brakes serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service. When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service. Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order to be activated: The vehicle must be at a standstill. The parking brake must be disabled. The transmission must be in park or neutral. The EPB switch not activated. The vehicle in ignition RUN mode. The brake pedal not pressed. While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash continuously while the ignition is in the RUN mode. A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated. When brake service work is complete, the following steps must be followed to reset the parking brake system to normal operation: Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. Press the brake pedal with moderate force. Apply the EPB Switch. A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that ser- 149

152 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! vice work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. MANUAL TRANSMISSION WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. CAUTION! Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal. To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to the floor and put the gear selector to the desired position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of the lever). REVERSE Ring To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and simultaneously move the lever to the left and then forward. Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position. Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply. 150

153 All Engines Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90) Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66) Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch. WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid. CAUTION! Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can CAUTION! damage the engine and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage. When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower. Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or damage the CAUTION! clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage. Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION! Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. 151

154 STARTING AND OPERATING Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24) CAUTION! If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released). NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel efficient nine-speed transmission. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster display. To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear 152 selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). WARNING! It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in

155 WARNING! PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. Gear Selector The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. 153

156 STARTING AND OPERATING The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet the needs of FCA current and future lineup of FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize the customer s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving situations and conditions. 154 Gear Selector Lock Button Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. CAUTION! After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. Gear Ranges PARK (P) This range supplements the Electric Park Brake (EPB) by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the EPB when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the EPB. When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. When exiting the vehicle, always: Apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the ignition OFF. Remove the key fob from the vehicle. WARNING! Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear

157 WARNING! selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. WARNING! When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also CAUTION! press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position: When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the gear selector, and firmly move the gear selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated. Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking. With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. 155

158 STARTING AND OPERATING NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the electric park brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle. WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in In Case Of Emergency for further information. 156 DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. AutoStick AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more

159 control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing and many other situations. Operation When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below. The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine overspeed. The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. The transmission will automatically downshift to first or second gear (depending on model) when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. You can start out (from a stop) in first or second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snow or icy conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to select the desired gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop. If a requested downshift would cause the engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur. The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically. Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled. The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected. To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is electronically monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be 157

160 STARTING AND OPERATING illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF. 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required. Ignition Park Interlock Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go: This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock, which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. Also, the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing the button on the gear selector to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. 158

161 1 SET+/Accel 2 RES/Resume 3 On/Off 4 SET-/Decel 5 CANC/Cancel Speed Control Buttons In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. The Speed Control function will not work in 4WD Low Range. Activation Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. WARNING! Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go WARNING! faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. Setting A Desired Speed Turn the Speed Control on. The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Varying The Speed To Increase Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. 159

162 STARTING AND OPERATING The driver s preferred units can be selected through the Uconnect system if equipped. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Decrease Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver s preferred units can be selected through the Uconnect system if equipped. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Accelerating For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). Deactivation A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory. Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition to OFF erases the set speed from memory. 160

163 REAR PARKSENSE The Rear ParkSense system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Rear ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN position. Rear ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. Rear ParkSense Sensors The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. Chime By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in the case of the presence of a rear obstacle, an acoustic signal that varies with the distance of the obstacle from the bumper is activated. The frequency of the acoustic signal: Increases with the distance between vehicle and object decreases. Becomes continuous when the distance that separates the vehicle from the obstacle is less than approximately 12 inches (30 cm), while terminates immediately if the distance to the obstacle increases. Remains constant if the distance between vehicle and obstacle remains unchanged. If this situation occurs for the side sensors, the signal is stopped after approximately three seconds to avoid, for example, it activates in case of maneuver along a wall. When the system emits a beeping sound, the volume of the Uconnect system, if turned on, is automatically lowered by Rear ParkSense. Detection Distances If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is taken into account only what is the shorter distance. Instrument Cluster Display Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instrument cluster only if you have selected the item "Beep and Display" inside the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect system. If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous. 161

164 STARTING AND OPERATING In general, the vehicle is closest to the obstacle when the display shows only a flashing arc and the chime becomes continuous. The color on the display depends on the distance and location of the obstacle. Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear ParkSense switch. When the Rear ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show a message such as PARKSENSE DISABLED for approximately five seconds. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel in your Owner s Manual at for further information. The Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. 162 Rear ParkSense will remember the previous state when the vehicle is switch off. CAUTION! After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear ParkSense remains in this setting until the next ignition cycle, even in the case of changing the setting of starting RUN to OFF and then again in RUN. Service The Rear ParkSense System During vehicle start up, when the Rear ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will show a message such as PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in your Owner s Manual at manuals/ for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show a message such as "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for for approximately five seconds. Under this condition, Rear ParkSense will not operate. If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle the ignition. if the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer. If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer. ParkSense System Usage Precautions Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear ParkSense system operating properly.

165 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear ParkSense. Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look WARNING! behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. CAUTION! ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. If it s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter out the trailer hitch and hitch ball assembly presence in sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be performed only by an authorized dealer. 163

166 STARTING AND OPERATING LANESENSE LaneSense Operation The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries. When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the Lane- Sense system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time. When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided. When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver s hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the driver when the driver s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel. Turning LaneSense On Or Off The default status of LaneSense is off. The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. To turn the LaneSense system on, push the Lane- Sense button (LED turns off). A Lane Sense On message is shown in the instrument cluster display. To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button once (LED turns on). The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN position. 164

167 LaneSense Warning Message The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display. Base Instrument Cluster Display If Equipped When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the Lane- Sense telltale is solid white. Left Lane Departure Only Left Lane Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow. The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected. Left Lane Departure Both Lanes Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is armed to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid white. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the right. When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time, torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the right. The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure. Premium Instrument Cluster Display If Equipped When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the Lane- Sense telltale is solid white. 165

168 STARTING AND OPERATING Left Lane Departure Only Left Lane Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow. The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected. Left Lane Departure Both Lanes Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both lane markings have 166 been detected and the system is armed to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. The Lane- Sense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure. Changing LaneSense Status The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system screen. When enabled the system operates above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).

169 REAR BACK UP CAMERA The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of your vehicle's rear surroundings when the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a note to Check Entire Surroundings across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The camera is located above the rear license plate. Parking Camera When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. A touchscreen button to disable the camera is available when the vehicle is not in RE- VERSE or if touchscreen button X at the top of the camera screen is pressed. Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via Uconnect Settings. When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone: Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0-1ft(0-30cm) Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater) 167

170 STARTING AND OPERATING If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up Camera should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. CAUTION! To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Back Up Camera to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Back Up Camera. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive Low (4WD Low) Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels. Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics. CAUTION! All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit. Four Wheel Drive (4x4) The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal driving mode. It is not possible to carry out the change of mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h). Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4) The buttons for the activation of four wheel drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain and allow you to select the following: 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW (Trailhawk models only) 168

171 Active Drive Control If Equipped Selec-Terrain Switch The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure immediate availability of torque to the rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the following ways: When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed. When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from AUTO to any other off-road modes. Active Drive With Low Control (Trailhawk Models Only) Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk) The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road performance in all modes. To enable 4WD Low, please follow the steps below: Enabling 4WD LOW With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in RUN mode or with the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and push the button once 4WD LOW. The instrument cluster will display the message "4WD LOW" once the shift is complete. Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and then become active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the shift is complete. The instrument cluster display will illuminate the "4WD Low" icon. Disabling 4WD LOW To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW button once. 169

172 STARTING AND OPERATING SELEC-TERRAIN Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all terrains. Mode Selection Guide Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode. 170 Selec-Terrain Switch Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk) AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and off road. This mode balances traction to ensure maneuverability and acceleration improvement compared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode also reduces fuel consumption, since it allows the disconnect of the drive shaft where conditions permit. SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability under conditions of bad weather. It's used on and off road and on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission will use second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage, except for in 4 Low (Trailhawk models only). SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as sandy bottoms. The transmission is set to provide maximum traction. This mode allows more wheel spin and higher shift points to help motor through loose areas. MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads covered by mud or wet grass. ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available in 4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to maximize traction and allow the highest steering capacity for offroad surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum performance off-road. Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.

173 Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped with the Trailhawk package. Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control for steep downhill control. Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Safety located in the Owner s Manual at manuals/ for further information. Emergency Refueling Procedure If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows: Open the liftgate and remove the emergency fuel fill funnel located in the cargo area. Open the fuel door. Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the filler pipe and proceed to fill the fuel tank. ADDING FUEL The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle. The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it prevents the filling of an incorrect type of fuel. Opening The Door For filling proceed as follows: Open the door, by pushing and releasing on the indentation point indicated by the arrow. Fuel Filler Door Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and proceed with filling the fuel tank. Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10 seconds to allow the fuel to flow inside of the tank. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then close the door. Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and close the door. 171

174 STARTING AND OPERATING Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the cargo area. WARNING! Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of the filler neck other than is provided on the car. The use of objects/plugs do not comply with the vehicle and may cause pressure increases inside the tank, creating dangerous conditions. WARNING! Do not approach the neck of the tank with open flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme fire hazard. Also, avoid close contact with the filler pipe with your face, do not inhale harmful vapors. Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of the pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible risk of fire. TRAILER TOWING Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. 1.4L Turbo Engine Trailer towing is not recommended. Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note) 2.4L 2,000 lbs (900 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to Tire Safety Information in Servicing And Maintenance for further information. 172

175 Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: The tongue weight of the trailer. The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. The weight of the driver and all passengers. Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealerinstalled options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. RECREATIONAL TOWING Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details. You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings. 173

176 STARTING AND OPERATING Recreational Towing Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the transmission in PARK. Turn the engine OFF. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do not start the engine. Press and hold the brake pedal. Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake pedal. CAUTION! DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 174

177 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs FUSES Engine Compartment Fuses/ Distribution Unit Body Computer Fuse Center Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage Preparations For Jacking Jacking Instructions Road Tire Installation TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Replacing The Sealant JUMPSTARTING Preparations For Jump Start Jump Starting Procedure REFUELING IN EMERGENCY IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS..195 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped..199 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM(EARS) EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

178 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank below the radio. Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs Interior Bulbs Lamps Front Courtesy Light Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) Interior Lights Dome Light (Glove Compartment) This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in OFF mode. With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery. Bulb Number C5W C5W C5W C5W W5W W5W 176

179 Exterior Bulbs Lamps Bi-Xenon HID Headlamps Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Front Direction Indicator Lamps Front Fog Lamps Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Reverse License Plate Lamp Bulb Number (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) H13 P21/5W PY21W H11 WY5W P21W LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) W16W W5W 177

180 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY FUSES WARNING! When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. WARNING! If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left side of the engine compartment. Refer to your Owner's Manual at for further fuse information Engine Compartment Fuse Location Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F01 70 Amp Tan Module Body Computer F02 70 Amp Tan Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units F03 20 Amp Blue Controller Power Supply Body Computer 178

181 Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F04 30 Amp Pink Brake Control Electronics Module F05 70 Amp Tan Electric Power-Assisted Steering F06 20 Amp Yellow Engine Cooling fan F07 40 Amp Orange Engine Cooling fan 1.4 Without A/C 50 Amp Red 1.4 With A/C And All 2.4 Models F08 30 Amp Pink Automatic Transmission, GSM F09 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine F10 15 Amp Blue Horn F11 10 Amp Red 1.4 Engines Supply Secondary Loads 25 Amp Clear 2.4 Engines F Amp Brown Heater "Blow By" F14 5 Amp Tan Pump Power "After Run" F15 40 Amp Orange Brake Control Module Pump F16 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission F17 10 Amp Red 1.4 Engines 15 Amp Blue 2.4 Engines Supply Primary Loads 179

182 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F18 20 Amp Yellow 12V Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition Powered F Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor F20 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four- Wheel Drive F21 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump F22 20 Amp Yellow Power Control Module Engine F23 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield If Equipped F24 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission F30 20 Amp Yellow (Customer Installed) 12V Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Battery Powered F83 40 Amp Green Air Conditioning Fan F84 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive F87 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission F Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors F89 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window F90 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State Of Charge) 180

183 Body Computer Fuse Center The controller is located at the left side of the steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel. For the fuse replacement see your authorized dealer. Cavity Mini Fuse Description F Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan Air Conditioning F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side) F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side) F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, Alarm, Power Folding Outside Mirrors, USB Port F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking F Amp Brown Power Under Lock and Key F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side) F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side) F Amp Brown Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Mirror, Electric Motor Retractable Roof, Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC System, ESL F Amp Brown Supply Air Bag 181

184 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Cavity Mini Fuse Description F Amp Brown Alarm Power, Front Courtesy Light, Air Conditioning Compressor, Brake Pedal Switch (NC), Plaque Automatic Transmission, Compass, Rear Camera, Leveling Headlights, Air Conditioning F Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter-N-Go F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area. Fuse Holder No. 1 The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped with trailer towing) is located closest to the front of the vehicle. Cavity Mini Fuse Description F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY F4 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat (Driver Side) F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side) F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Seat (Driver Side And Passenger Side) 182

185 Cavity Mini Fuse Description F7 30 Amp Green Lumbar Adjustment Front Seats (Driver Side And Passenger Side) F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse for the sun visor of the retractable roof. Fuse Holder No. 2 Cavity Mini Fuse Description F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side) F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side) 183

186 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage The jack and tools are located in the rear storage compartment if equipped, inside a special container. Jack And Tools Location Jack And Tools 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor pull strap. 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire. 4. Remove the chocks. 5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench. 6. Remove the spare tire. 184

187 WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 3. Set the Electric Park Brake. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 5. Turn the ignition off to the OFF position. 6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. 185

188 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Jacking Instructions WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. Apply the parking brake and place an automatic transmission in PARK. Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. WARNING! If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. 186

189 Jacking Locations Jack Warning Label 187

190 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench. 2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle. 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding. Front Jacking Location 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire. WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. 7. Mount the spare tire. CAUTION! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. 4. Place the jack underneath the jacking location that is closest to the flat tire. Jacking location is indicated by a stamped arrow on the body. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack Rear Jacking Location 188

191 Mounting Spare Tire Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare tire or a limited use spare tire. Refer to Tires General Information in Servicing And Maintenance in your Owner s Manual at for further information. For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The correct torque specification for the wheel bolts is 89 Ft-Lbs (120 Nm). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station. 11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat tire. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. Road Tire Installation 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 189

192 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The correct torque specification for the wheel bolts is 89 Ft-Lbs (120 Nm). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station. 5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks. Stow the jack and tools back in the proper storage location. Release the Electric Park Brake before driving the vehicle. 6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel. TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage compartment inside a storage container. Located inside the container are a screwdriver and the emergency fuel funnel. To access the Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and remove the load floor. Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Tire Service Kit Components 1 Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit) 2 Sealant Hose (Clear) 3 Power Button 4 Pressure Gauge 5 Warning Label 190

193 If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear storage compartment inside the storage container. Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can be repaired; the kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove the foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail. 1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve. 2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet socket. Start the vehicle engine. 3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the I position. The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air will inflate the tire. Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the tire. 4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process. When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest authorized dealer. WARNING! Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Fail- WARNING! ure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized dealer. If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and continue driving. 5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire has been treated with Tire Service Kit. WARNING! The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. 191

194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions WARNING! Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. If the tire has any sidewall damage. If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. If the wheel has any damage. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source. WARNING! A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water WARNING! and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. Replacing The Sealant Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration date at your authorized dealer. Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location 192

195 WARNING! Store the sealant canister in its special compartment, away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and serious injury or death. JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions. WARNING! Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly. Battery Posts 1 Positive Battery Post 2 Negative Battery Post The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post. 193

196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING! Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. Proceed as follows: 1. Set the Electric Park Brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and place the ignition OFF. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. 194

197 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer. CAUTION! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. REFUELING IN EMERGENCY The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is described in the Emergency Refueling Procedure. Refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating for further information. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action. On the highways slow down. In city traffic while stopped, put transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads H, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. 195

198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Apply the Electric Park Brake. 3. Carefully separate the gear selector bezel and boot assembly from the center console. Gear Selector Bezel Location 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the gear selector override access hole (at the right front corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold the override release lever down. 6. Move the Gear Selector to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the gear selector bezel. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine. 196

199 For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Safety in your Owner s Manual at for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. CAUTION! When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/ SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). 197

200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS FOUR WHEEL DRIVE Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Front OK NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed. You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN mode. If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle s battery is discharged, refer to Gear Selector Override in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can be moved. CAUTION! Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to 198

201 CAUTION! your vehicle may result from improper towing. Front Wheel Drive (FWD) The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised). Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly. CAUTION! DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result. Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or power transfer unit will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's side of the vehicle. For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle. Place the ignition in the RUN and subsequently on ON, without opening the door. During towing remember that not having the aid of the power brakes and the electromechanical power steering, greater force is needed in applying the brakes and steering of the vehicle. WARNING! Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury. 199

202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION! Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System. Please refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). 200

203 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING Maintenance Plan ENGINE COMPARTMENT L Turbo Engine L Engine Checking Oil Level Cooling System Adding Washer Fluid Brake System Manual Transmission If Equipped..211 Automatic Transmission If Equipped Maintenance-Free Battery DEALERSERVICE Windshield Wiper Blades RAISINGTHEVEHICLE TIRES Tire Safety Information Tires General Information Tire Types Spare Tires If Equipped Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Tire Chains (Traction Devices) Tire Rotation Recommendations DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTA- TION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES Treadwear Traction Grades Temperature Grades STORINGTHEVEHICLE BODYWORK Preserving The Bodywork INTERIORS Seats And Fabric Parts Plastic And Coated Parts Leather Parts

204 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Required message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under these conditions. Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Check engine oil level. Check windshield washer fluid level. Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage. Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed. Check function of all interior and exterior lights. Maintenance Plan Required Maintenance Intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Change oil and filter. Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses. Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. Check and adjust hand brake. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Refer to the Maintenance Chart on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. 202

205 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90, , , , , , ,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96, , , , , , , , , ,000 Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary, check Tire Service Kit expiration date (if equipped). Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.). Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool). Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.). Check windshield/rear window wiper blade position/wear. Check operation of windshield washer system and adjust jets if necessary. 203

206 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and cleanliness and lubrication of linkages. Visually check the condition and wear of the front and rear brakes. Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV joints and replace if necessary. Visual inspect the condition of the accessory drive belt. Check the tension of the accessory drive belt. Inspect and replace, if required, front end accessory drive belt, tensioner, and, idler pulley. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. Change engine oil and replace oil filter.* Inspect the PTU fluid level. Inspect the rear differential fluid level. Replace spark plugs (1.4L Turbo engine). ** 112, ,000 90, , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

207 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90, , , , , , ,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96, , , , , , , , , ,000 Replace spark plugs (2.4L engine). ** Replace engine air filter. # Replace brake fluid every two years. *** Replace cabin filter. Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90 F (32 C). Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo Engine). Recommend replacement Mandatory service # The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas. * The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km). 205

208 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ** The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine: Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to Fluids and Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further information). Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the Maintenance Schedule for spark plug replacement. Contact your authorized dealer if you have any questions. *** The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a WARNING! service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 206

209 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1.4L Turbo Engine 1 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Battery 7 Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 Coolant Pressure Bottle 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 Oil Fill Cap 207

210 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 2.4L Engine 1 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 4 Battery 7 Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap 2 Engine Oil Fill Cap 5 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 Coolant Pressure Bottle 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 208

211 Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range. CAUTION! Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aera- CAUTION! tion, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine. Cooling System WARNING! Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead before working near the radiator cooling fan. You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not. WARNING! When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Coolant Checks Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser 209

212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to Engine Compartment in this section for further information. WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency. Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services, or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is on. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system. The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one system will not affect the other system. The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer for service. Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in the Technical Specifications section for further information. 210

213 WARNING! Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in the Technical Specifications section for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to WARNING! catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. CAUTION! Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. Manual Transmission If Equipped Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Please see your authorized dealer for service. Automatic Transmission If Equipped Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. 211

214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenancefree battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to Jump-Starting Procedure in In Case Of Emergency for further information. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. CAUTION! It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 212

215 Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. Service Position Strategy The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily changed. To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position. Service mode must be activated within two minutes after the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position. To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least half a second. At every valid activation of Service Position command, the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms. The Service Position command can be repeated several times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to a maximum of three times. After three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled. Function Deactivation: The functionality is reset if: The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position. Number of subsequent activations is three. Two minutes timer has expired after turning the ignition OFF. When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go into the parking position. Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the windshield. 2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade. 213

216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it. 1 Wiper Blade 2 Release Button 3 Wiper Arm Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass. 2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper blade end while pushing the wiper blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder on the wiper arm. 3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place. RAISING THE VEHICLE In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to your authorized dealer or service station. TIRES Tire Safety Information Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. 4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place. 214

217 Tire Markings Tire Markings 1 U.S. DOT 4 Maximum Safety Standards Load Code (TIN) 2 Size Designation Pressure 5 Maximum 3 Service Description Traction and Tem- 6 Treadwear, perature Grades P (Passenger) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT (Light Truck) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. 215

218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "...blank..." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) 216

219 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 217

220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or

221 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kpa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. 219

222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Loading And Tire Pressure The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual. Tire And Loading Information Placard Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. 220

223 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/ luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. ( (5x150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Metric Example For Load Limit For example, if XXX amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg ( (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. 221

224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 222

225 WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. Tires General Information Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety and Vehicle Stability Economy Tread Wear Ride Comfort Safety WARNING! Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. 223

226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door. At least once a month: Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven 224 for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kpa) per 12 F (7 C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68 F (20 C) and the outside temperature = 32 F (0 C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kpa), which equals 1 psi (7 kpa) for every 12 F (7 C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kpa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

227 Radial Ply Tires WARNING! Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria: The tire has not been driven on when flat. The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). The puncture is no greater than a¼ofan inch (6 mm). Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kpa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in In Case Of Emergency for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. 225

228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: Driving style. Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Distance driven. Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING! Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified 226

229 WARNING! for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F (5 C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING! Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. 227

230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non- 228 studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Spare Tires If Equipped For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit in In Case Of Emergency in your Owner s Manual on for further information. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. T,S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed

231 specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING! Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. WARNING! Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on WARNING! your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not 229

232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel surface. CAUTION! Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. These products and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, nonacidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion. Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. Tire Chains (Traction Devices) Use of traction devices require sufficient tireto-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. Install on front tires only. Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are recommended: 230

233 All Models: The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted with the use of 215/65R16 and 215/ 60R17 tires only. Front tires ONLY. Original equipment 215/65R17 (trailhawk tires), 225/55R18 tire sizes are NOT chainable. CAUTION! Use on front tires ONLY. Damage may result if tire chains or traction devices are used with original equipment size tires. WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. CAUTION! To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: CAUTION! Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. Observe the traction device manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). CAUTION! Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Tire Rotation Recommendations The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. 231

234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed. Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram. Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation CAUTION! Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear 232 The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government

235 course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not in- WARNING! clude acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Grades The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. STORING THE VEHICLE If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a month, observe the following precautions: Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy location the windows open slightly. Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged. 233

236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During storage check battery charge quarterly. If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical system, check the battery charge every thirty days. Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective waxes. Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying protective waxes. Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades and leave raised from the glass. Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care not to damage the painted surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface of the vehicle. Inflate the tires at a pressure of psi (+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on the tire placard and check it periodically. Do not drain the engine cooling system. Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two weeks or more, idle the engine for approximately five minutes with the air conditioning system on and high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation. When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer to Starting The Engine in Starting And Operating for further information. CAUTION! Before removal of the positive and negative terminals to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door. When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is closed. BODYWORK Preserving The Bodywork Washing Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. CAUTION! Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring 234

237 CAUTION! powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kpa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. INTERIORS Seats And Fabric Parts Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 235

238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Plastic And Coated Parts Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. CAUTION! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Leather Parts Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed to for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. 236

239 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION Chassis Number WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Torque Specifications FUELREQUIREMENTS L Turbo Engine L Engine Materials Added To Fuel FLUID CAPACITIES FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Engine Chassis

240 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION Chassis Number The chassis number (VIN) is stamped on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel cover, which is visible from outside the car through the windshield. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Torque Specifications Wheel Bolt Torque 89 Ft-Lbs (120 N m) **Wheel Bolt Size M12x1.25 Wheel Bolt Socket Size 17mm **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each bolt has been tightened twice. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) This number is also stamped on the floor of the passenger compartment, near the right front seat. Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench. 238

241 Torque Pattern After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1.4L Turbo Engine This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded "regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/ 2 method. For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. 2.4L Engine All available gasoline engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline having a octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane num- 239

242 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. FLUID CAPACITIES Materials Added To Fuel Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. U.S Fuel (Approximate) 1.4L Turbo/2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified) 4.0 Quarts 3.8 Liters 2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters Cooling System * 1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters 2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula) 6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Metric 240

243 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil 1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil 2.4L Engine Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 1.4L Turbo Engine Fuel Selection 2.4L Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. 91 Octane Recommended, 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol 241

244 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Chassis Component Manual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped Power Transfer Unit (PTU) If Equipped Rear Differential (RDM) If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid. Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5). We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5). We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable. DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regardless of mileage. 242

245 MULTIMEDIA MULTIMEDIA CYBERSECURITY TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL INFORMATION Steering Wheel Audio Controls Reception Conditions Care And Maintenance Anti-theft Protection UCONNECT ACCESS Uconnect Access If Equipped (Available On Uconnect 6.5 NAV U.S. Residents Only) Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect 6.5 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska And Hawaii) Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot (Uconnect 6.5 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States And Alaska) Using Uconnect Access Maintaining Your Uconnect Access Account Built-In Features (Uconnect 6.5 NAV)..252 Uconnect Access Remote Features RADIO Clock Setting Audio Setting Radio Operation Disc Operation (If Equipped) USB/Audio Jack (AUX) Manual Operation UCONNECT Clock Setting Audio Setting Radio Operation SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels..265 USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth Operation Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With iphone) UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect Get Started Basic Voice Commands Radio Media Phone Additional Information UCONNECT 6.5 NAV Clock Setting Audio Setting Radio SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels..280 Media Hub Playing ipod/usb/ MP3 Devices Uconnect 6.5 NAV Uconnect 6.5 NAV Voice Recognition Quick Tips Introducing Uconnect Get Started Basic Voice Commands Radio Media Phone Navigation (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) Uconnect Access If Equipped (6.5 NAV)

246 MULTIMEDIA Register (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) Mobile App (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) Voice Texting (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) Yelp (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) SiriusXM Travel Link (Uconnect 6.5 NAV US Market Only) Siri Eyes Free If Equipped Additional Information UCONNECT SETTINGS UCONNECT PHONE Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling) Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System Common Phone Commands (Examples) Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle Phonebook Voice Command Tips Changing The Volume Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With iphone) Helpful Tips And Common Questions To Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your Uconnect System

247 CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly. Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed. WARNING! It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates. To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should: Routinely check software-update to learn about available Uconnect software updates. Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel in your Owner s Manual. 245

248 MULTIMEDIA TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL INFORMATION Steering Wheel Audio Controls The steering wheel audio controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Push the button in the center to change modes AM/FM/CD/SXM/AUX/USB or BTSA (Bluetooth Streaming Audio) If Equipped. Left Switch Push the switch up or down to search for the next listenable station. Push the button in the center to select the next preset station (radio). The display lens should not come into contact with pointed or rigid objects which could damage its surface; use a soft, dry anti-static cloth to clean and do not press. Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to clean the display lens. Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could damage it beyond repair. Anti-theft Protection Steering Wheel Audio Controls Right Switch Push the switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume. Reception Conditions Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, especially when you are far away from the broadcaster. The volume may be increased when receiving traffic alerts and news. Care And Maintenance Observe the following precautions to ensure the system is fully operational: The system is equipped with an anti-theft protection system based on the exchange of information with the electronic control unit (Body Computer) on the vehicle. This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the secret code from being entered after the power supply has been disconnected. If the check has a positive outcome, the system will start to operate, whereas if the comparison codes are not the same or if the electronic control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the system will ask the user to enter the secret code according to the procedure described in the paragraph below. 246

249 Entering The Secret Code When the system is switched on, if the code is requested, the display will show "Please Enter Anti-Theft Code" followed by the screen showing a keypad to enter the secret code. The secret code has four numbers from zero to nine: to insert the code numbers, rotate the BROWSE/ENTER dial and press to confirm. After entering the fourth number the system will start functioning. If an incorrect code is entered, the system displays "Incorrect Code" to notify the user of the need to enter the correct code. After the three available attempts to enter the code, the system displays "Incorrect Code. Radio locked. Wait for 30 minutes". After the text has disappeared it is possible to start the code entering procedure again. Vehicle Radio Passport This document certifies ownership of the system. The vehicle radio passport shows the system model, serial number and secret code. In case you lose the radio passport, please go to Jeep Assistance Network with an ID and the vehicle papers. Keep the vehicle radio passport in a safe place so that you can give the information to the relevant authorities if the system is stolen. UCONNECT ACCESS Uconnect Access If Equipped (Available On Uconnect 6.5 NAV U.S. Residents Only) WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and WARNING! applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. Uconnect Access enhances your ownership and driving experience by connecting your vehicle to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network. When connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network, you can: Place a call to a local Operator for emergency assistance. Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using the Uconnect Access App from your device. You can also do so by logging into Mopar Owner Connect, or by calling Uconnect Care when your vehicle has an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) net- 247

250 MULTIMEDIA work connection. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. Turn your vehicle into a 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot and connect your devices to the internet. Receive text or notifications if your vehicle's theft alarm goes off. Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS technology to help authorities locate your vehicle if it is stolen. Listen to your text messages or send freeform text messages with your voice while keeping your hands on the wheel, using the Voice Texting feature. Requires a device that supports Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP). Search for places to eat, shop, relax and play with Yelp, using your voice or onscreen menu. Then navigate to them (navigation standard on Uconnect 6.5 NAV). Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button on your Overhead Console. 248 Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use Uconnect Access. 1. The ASSIST and buttons are located in your Overhead Console. The AS- SIST button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect Care. The button connects you to emergency services. Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have Call system capabilities or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to system calls. 2. The Uconnect Apps on the radio touchscreen. This is where you can begin your registration process, manage your Apps and purchase 3G Wi-Fi on demand. 3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the left side of your steering wheel. These buttons let you use your voice to give commands, make phone calls, send and receive text messages hands-free, enter navigation destinations, and control your radio and media devices. Included Trial Period For New Vehicles Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the Uconnect Access Services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales notification from your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first register with Uconnect Access. After the trial period, if you wish to continue your Uconnect Access Services you can choose to purchase a subscription. Features And Packages After the trial period, you can subscribe to continue your service by visiting the Uconnect Store located within the Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com. If you need assistance, U.S. residents can call Uconnect Care at For the latest information on packages and pricing information: U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com.

251 Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect 6.5 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska And Hawaii) To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access. 1. Push the ASSIST button on the overhead console. 2. Press the Uconnect Care button on the touchscreen. 3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details. Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or, push the MORE button on the faceplate then press the Apps button on the touchscreen and select the Uconnect registration app to Register By Web and complete the process using your device or computer. Why sign up for Uconnect Access? Here are just a few examples of things you ll be able to do: Know that help, if you need it, is only a button press away. Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds of miles away. Discover great, new places around you using Yelp. Dictate and send text messages by speaking out loud (all while keeping both hands on the wheel!) For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com. Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot (Uconnect 6.5 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States And Alaska) Subscriptions, and 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot, can be purchased from the Uconnect Store within your vehicle, and online at Mopar Owner Connect. If you need help push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, then select Uconnect Care (or dial ). You must set up a Uconnect Access Payment Account online (log in to moparownerconnect.com, go to Edit Profile, then Uconnect Payment Account, to set up and manage your Payment Account). 249

252 MULTIMEDIA Using Uconnect Access Getting Started With Apps Applications (Apps for short) in your Uconnect Access system are designed to deliver the features and services that you want using the 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network on your Uconnect 6.5 NAV radio. Get started with your Uconnect Access apps by pushing the MORE button on the faceplate and then the Apps button on the touchscreen. Available apps and features are organized by the tabs on the left of the screen: Favorite Apps This is the default screen when you first press the Apps button on the touchscreen, and is a good place to put the apps you use most frequently. To make an App a favorite, press the favorite button on the touchscreen to the right of the app until the star is illuminated making the App a favorite. All Apps All of your available Apps will reside in the All Apps folder. Running Apps Press this tab to see which apps are currently running. 250

253 Favorite Apps 1 Favorite Apps Tab 2 Favorite Button 251

254 MULTIMEDIA Maintaining Your Uconnect Access Account Selling Your Vehicle When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that you remove your Uconnect Access Account information from the vehicle. You can do this on the Mopar Owner Connect website (moparownerconnect.com). Removing your account information cancels your subscription and makes your vehicle factory-ready for a new owner/subscriber. For additional information on Uconnect: U.S. residents - visit DriveUconnect.com or call Canadian Residents - visit DriveUconnect.ca or call, (English) or (French) Built-In Features (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access WARNING! services, including and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you may not have Call service if needed. If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Call system immediately. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the WARNING! system may not send a signal to a operator if an air bag is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately. If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. The Call system is embedded into the vehicle s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. 252

255 WARNING! IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD- ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI- DENT), the Uconnect features, apps and services, among others, will not operate. Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. 1. Assist Call The overhead console contains an ASSIST push button which (once registered) automatically connects the vehicle occupants to one of these predefined destinations for immediate support: And ASSIST Buttons Button 2 ASSIST Button Roadside Assistance Call If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, you ll be connected to someone who can help anytime. Additional fees may apply. Additional information in this section. Uconnect Access Care In vehicle support for Uconnect Access System, Apps and Features. Vehicle Care Total support for your FCA US LLC vehicle. 2. Emergency Call (If Equipped) The overhead console contains a button that, when pressed, may place a call from your vehicle to a local operator to request help from local police, fire or ambulance personnel. If this button is accidentally pressed, you will have 10 seconds to stop the call. To cancel, press the Call button again or press the Cancel button shown on the touchscreen. After ten seconds has passed, the call will be placed and only the operator can cancel it. The LED light on the overhead console will turn green once a connection to a operator has been made. The green LED light will turn off once the call is terminated. Have an authorized dealer service the vehicle if the overhead console light is continuously red. On equipped vehicles, this feature requires a functioning electrical system and an operable 1X (voice/ 253

256 MULTIMEDIA data) or 3G (data) network connection to function properly. If a connection is made between a operator and your vehicle, you understand and agree that operators may, like any other call, record conversations and sounds in and near your vehicle upon connection. 3. Roadside Assistance (If Equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with this feature and has an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection, you may be able to connect with Roadside Assistance by pushing the "ASSIST" button on the overhead console. You will be presented with Assist Care options. Make a selection by pressing the prompts displayed on the radio. If Roadside Assistance is provided to your vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to provide Uconnect Services to you, we may record and monitor your conversations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect Care or Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are initiated through the Uconnect Services in your vehicle, your device or via a landline device, and 254 may share information obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such call recordings. 4. Yelp Customers have the ability to search for nearby destinations or a point of interest (POI) either by category or custom search by using keywords (for example, Italian restaurant ). Searching can be done by either voice or by using the touchscreen keypad. Using the touchscreen, launch Yelp by selecting the Apps icon, press the All Apps tab, and then press Yelp. Using voice recognition, push the Voice Command (VR) button on the steering wheel and say Launch Yelp, then follow the instructions on the Teleprompter. 5. Security Alarm Notification The Security Alarm Notification feature notifies you via or text (SMS) message when the vehicle s factory-installed security alarm system has been set-off. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may have been triggered, one of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you register, Security Alarm Notification is automatically set to send you an at the mail address you provide should the alarm go off. You may also opt to have a text message sent to your mobile device. 6. Stolen Vehicle Assistance If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforcement immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this report has been filed, Uconnect care can help locate your vehicle. The Uconnect Care agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. Then, using GPS technology and the built-in wireless connection within your vehicle, the Uconnect Care agent will be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to help recover it. Your vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection and must be registered with Uconnect Access with an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.

257 7. 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle feature that connects your device to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network using Uconnect Access and is ready to go where ever you are. Once your vehicle is registered for Uconnect Access, you can purchase a 3G Wi-fi Hotspot subscription at the Uconnect Store. After you've made your purchase, turn on your signal and connect your passengers devices. It's never been easier to bring your home or office with you. WARNING! NEVER use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot when you are driving the vehicle. As the driver, you should only use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot when the vehicle is parked in a safe location. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Your vehicle must have a working electrical system for any of the in vehicle Uconnect features to operate. Uconnect Access Remote Features If you own a compatible iphone or Android powered device, the Uconnect Access App allows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine or activate your horn and lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote start and your vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/ data) or 3G (data) network connection). Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. You can download the App from Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store (iphone) or Google Play store. Visit UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device is compatible. For Uconnect Phone customer support and to determine if your device is compatible. U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call Remote Start This feature provides the ability to start the engine on your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of two ways: 1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a compatible smartphone. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off automatically. You can also send a command to turnoff an engine that has been remote started. This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factoryinstalled Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the Uconnect Access App is downloaded, login with your user name and password. Your four digit Uconnect Security PIN is required to confirm the request. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an or text (SMS) message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect (moparownerconnect.com) and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications. 255

258 MULTIMEDIA Remote Door Lock/Unlock This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways: 1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a compatible smartphone. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. 3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the phone. To use this feature after the Uconnect Access App is downloaded, login using your user name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the request. Press the closed lock icon on your Uconnect Access App to lock the doors, and press the open lock icon to unlock the driver s door. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an or text (SMS) message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect (moparownerconnect.com) and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications. Remote Horn And Lights It s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways: 1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a compatible smartphone. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. 3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the phone. To use this feature after the Uconnect Access App is downloaded, login using your user name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the request. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an or text (SMS) message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect (moparownerconnect.com) and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications. Voice Texting Want to dictate a personal message? Register with Uconnect Access to take advantage of a new, cloudbased Voice Texting service, an enhancement to Voice Text Reply. Voice Texting allows you to compose a new text or reply to an incoming text message. Before you attempt to use the Voice Texting feature, check to ensure you have the following: 1. A paired, Bluetooth enabled phone with the Message Access Profile (MAP). Not all Bluetooth enabled phones support MAP, including all iphones (Apple ios). Visit UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility information. 2. An active Uconnect Access trial or paid subscription. 3. Accept the Allow MAP profile request on your smart phone. (Please refer to device manufacturer instructions for details). 256

259 To Send A Text Message: 1. Push the Uconnect Phone Button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the beep. 3. Say Text. 4. Uconnect will prompt you Say the phone number, or full name and phone type of the contact you want to send a message to. 5. Wait for the beep and say a contact that is in your phonebook, or a mobile phone number that you would like to send the message to. Sample Commands For Voice Text Reply And Voice Texting Example Command Text John Smith Text Show messages Listen to/view (message number four, for example) Reply Forward text/message to John Smith Forward text/message to Uconnect will prompt you Please say the message that you would like to send. (If you do not hear this prompt, you may not have an active subscription with Uconnect Access). 7. Wait for the beep, and then dictate any message up to 140 characters. If you exceed 140 characters, you will hear the following prompt: Message was too long; your message will be truncated. 8. Uconnect will then repeat the message back to you. 9. Uconnect will prompt you: To add to your message, say Continue; To delete the current message and start over, say Start Over; to send the current message, say Send; to hear the message again, say Repeat. 10. If you are happy with your message and would like to send it, wait for the beep and say Send. 11. Uconnect will then say Sending your message. Action Send a message to specific contact in address book Send a message from your phonebook See recent text messages listed by number on Uconnect screen Hear messages or read it on Uconnect screen Send a voice text reply to a current message Forward current text to specific contact in address book Forward current text to specific phone number 257

260 MULTIMEDIA RADIO 3.0 Radio RADIO Button 2 INFO Button 3 A-B-C Button 4 Preset Buttons 5 BROWSE/ENTER Button TUNE/SCROLL Knob 6 SEEK Up Button 7 BACK Button 8 Play/Pause MUTE Button 9 MENU Button 10 SEEK Down Button 11 AUDIO Button 12 ON/OFF Button VOLUME Knob 13 MEDIA Button 258

261 Clock Setting 1. Push the Menu button at the bottom of the radio, and push the Enter/Browse button for System Settings. Next, select the Time and Format setting and then select Set Time by pushing the Enter/Browse button. 2. Adjust the hours or minutes by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then pushing the Enter/ Browse button to move to the next entry. You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then pushing the Enter/Browse button on the desired selection. 3. Once the time is set, press the Back button to exit the time screen. Audio Setting Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio settings. Treble, Mid, Bass, Fade, Balance, Speed Adjusted Volume, Loudness and AUX Offset Select the desired setting to adjust, then push the ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting + or -. Push the Back button when done. Radio Operation Seek Up/Down Buttons Push the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands. Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping. Store Radio Presets Manually The presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pushing any of the six preset buttons. The Radio stores up to 18 presets in each of the Radio modes. Push the A-B-C button on the faceplate to select the A, B, or C preset list. To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below: 1. Tune to the desired station. 2. Push and hold the desired numbered button for more than two seconds, or until you hear a confirmation beep. Disc Operation (If Equipped) Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console storage bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin. CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pushing the MEDIA button located on the side of the display. Once in Media Mode, select Disc. Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on the illustration located on the Disc player. Seek Up/Down Buttons Push to seek through CD tracks. Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping. 259

262 MULTIMEDIA USB/Audio Jack (AUX) Manual Operation To select a specific audio source, push the MEDIA button on the faceplate and select from the following modes: USB/iPod USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or ipod cable into the USB port or by pushing the ME- DIA button located left of the display. Audio Jack (AUX) The AUX allows a device such as an MP3 player or an ipod to be plugged into the radio and utilize the vehicle s audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the source and play through the vehicle s speakers. The functions of the device are controlled using the device buttons, not the buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or the device. 260

263 UCONNECT 5.0 Uconnect 5.0 Radio Buttons 1 RADIO Button 2 Display ON/OFF Control 3 COMPASS Button 4 MORE Functions Button 5 BROWSE/ENTER Button TUNE/SCROLL Knob 6 Back Button 7 Mute Button 8 System On/Off Volume Control Knob 9 Uconnect PHONE Button 10 MEDIA Button 261

264 MULTIMEDIA CAUTION! Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen. Clock Setting To start the clock setting procedure: 1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate. 2. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen, then press the Clock and Date button. 3. Press the Set Time button on the touchscreen. 4. Press the Up or Down arrows to adjust the hours or minutes, then select the AM or PM button on the touchscreen. You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen. 5. Once the time is set press the Done button on the touchscreen to exit the time screen. In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select Display Clock. Display Clock turns the clock display in the status bar on or off. Audio Setting 1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate. 2. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen. 3. Scroll down and press the Audio button on the touchscreen to open the Audio menu. 4. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio settings. Equalizer Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble. Use the + or - button on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your desired settings. Balance/Fade Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the speakers. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. 262

265 Speed Adjusted Volume If Equipped Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle speed. Loudness If Equipped Press the Loudness button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. When this feature is activated it improves sound quality at lower volumes. Surround Sound If Equipped Press the Surround Sound button on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen. When this feature is activated, it provides simulated surround sound mode. 263

266 MULTIMEDIA Radio Operation Radio Operation 1 Radio Station Preset 2 All Presets 3 Seek Next 4 Audio Settings 5 Station Information 6 Direct Tune 7 Radio Band 8 Seek Previous 264

267 Store Radio Presets Manually The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes. There are four visible presets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing the All button on the touchscreen on the radio home screen will display all of the preset stations for that mode. To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below: 1. Tune to the desired station. 2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds, or until you hear a confirmation beep. Seek Next/Previous Buttons Press the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands. Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping. SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race and more. And get 20+ Xtra channels, including SiriusXM Latino, a selection of channels dedicated to Spanish language programming. To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the RADIO Button on the faceplate and then the SXM button on the touchscreen. SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at for U.S. residents and for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at and for Canadian residents. All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. 265

268 MULTIMEDIA USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth Operation USB Port And Audio Jack (AUX) 1 USB Port 2 AUX/Audio Jack USB/AUX The USB/AUX Jack is located in the center of the gear shift zone, below the HVAC controls. USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or an ipod cable into the USB port or by pushing the ME- DIA button on the faceplate located below the display. Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the touchscreen and select USB/iPod. The USB source will say "ipod" only when an apple product is connected to the USB port. Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate, press the Source button on the touchscreen then select USB/iPod to change the mode to the USB device. If the device is connected, music from your portable device will play through the vehicle's speakers. Audio Jack (AUX) The AUX jack allows a portable device, such as an MP3 player or an ipod, to be plugged into the radio and utilize the vehicle s audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate, press the Source button on the touchscreen then select AUX to change the mode to AUX. The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device. However, the volume may be controlled using the radio or portable device. Bluetooth If using a Bluetooth - equipped device, you may also be able to stream music to your vehicle's sound system. Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate, press the Source button on the touchscreen then select Bluetooth to change the mode to Bluetooth. If the device is paired, music from your portable device will play through the vehicle's speakers. If changing the name of the device within the Bluetooth settings of your device (where applicable), and the device is connected to the vehicle Bluetooth system, the system may change the current playing track. 266

269 Uconnect 5.0 Available Media Hubs Uconnect 5.0 Media Hub (USB, AUX Ports) Remote USB Port (Fully Functional) S N/A S S = Standard Equipment N/A = Not Available Remote USB Port (Charging Only) Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With iphone) Once your Uconnect system is paired with a compatible mobile device, the system can announce a new incoming text message, and read it to you over the vehicle audio system. You can reply to the message using Voice Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of the 18 pre-defined messages. Here s how: 1. Push the Uconnect Phone button and wait for the beep, then say reply. Uconnect will give the following prompt: Please say the message you would like to send. 2. Wait for the beep and say one of the pre-defined messages. (If you are not sure, you can say help ). Uconnect will then read the pre-defined messages allowed. 3. As soon as you hear the message you would like to send, you can interrupt the list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect phone button and saying the phrase. Uconnect will confirm the message by reading it back to you. 4. Push the Phone button and say Send. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later. No. Start without me. I ll be late. Okay. Call me. Where are you? Are you there yet? I will be <5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60>* minutes late. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES I ll call you later. I m on my way. I m lost. I need directions. Can t talk right now. See you in <5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60>* minutes. Thanks. *Use only the numbering listed or the system may not transpose the message. Voice texting reply and voice texting features require a compatible mobile device enabled with Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP). iphone and some other smartphones do not currently support Bluetooth MAP. Visit UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility. Want to dictate a personal message? You must first register with Uconnect Access (U.S. residents only) to take advantage of a new, cloud-based Voice Texting service, an enhancement to Voice Text Reply. 267

270 MULTIMEDIA UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 system. Key Features: Five-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/USB/Bluetooth Bluetooth with integrated voice control 268

271 Get Started 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. Uconnect Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first press either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pressing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category. All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. 269

272 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons 1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 Push For Voice Recognition (VR) 3 Push To End Call 270

273 Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. Push the VR button. After the beep, say: Cancel to stop a current voice session Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. WARNING! Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. 271

274 MULTIMEDIA Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Uconnect 5.0 Visual Cues Push the VR button. After the beep, say: Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say Help. The system will provide you with a list of commands. 272

275 Media Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. Change source to Bluetooth Change source to ipod Change source to USB Uconnect 5.0 Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your ipod or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed. Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and ipod devices. 273

276 MULTIMEDIA Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Uconnect 5.0 Media U.S./Canadian residents can visit: UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. Push the Phone button. After the beep, say one of the following commands Call John Smith Dial and follow the system prompts Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) Call back (call previous incoming phone number) 274

277 TIP: When providing a Voice Command, press the Phone button and say Call, then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say Call John Smith work. Uconnect 5.0 Phone 275

278 MULTIMEDIA Additional Information 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and Uconnect are registered trademarks of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp. Uconnect System Support: U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: (24 hours a day 7 days a week) Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: (English) or (French) Mon. Fri., 8:00 am 8:00 pm, ET Sat., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET Sun., Closed Uconnect Access Services Support Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call. 276

279 UCONNECT 6.5 NAV Uconnect 6.5NAV Radio Buttons 1 Display On/Off Control 2 Settings Button 3 Back Button 4 BROWSE/ENTER Button TUNE/SCROLL Knob 5 APPS Functions Button 6 Uconnect PHONE Button 7 Uconnect Navigation (NAV) Button 8 MEDIA Button 9 RADIO Button 10 On/Off Button Volume Knob 11 Mute Button 277

280 MULTIMEDIA Clock Setting Displaying The Time If the time is not currently displayed on the radio or player main page press the Settings button. In the Settings list, press the Clock button on the touchscreen then press On or Off for Show Time in Status Bar. Setting The Time Uconnect 6.5 NAV synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so should not require any time adjustment. If you do need to set the time manually, follow the instructions below. Turn the unit on, then press the time display at the top of the screen, a pop-up will ask if you want to set the time. Press Yes. If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, push the Settings button. In the Settings screen, press the Clock button on the touchscreen, then select ON for Show Time Status. Press + or next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. If these features are not available, press Off for Sync with GPS. 278 Press X to exit out of the Clock Setting screen. Audio Setting Press the Audio button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume. You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X or back arrow located at the top right. Balance/Fade Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons on the touchscreen or press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade. Equalizer Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen. Press the + or - buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands. Speed Adjusted Volume If Equipped Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the + and buttons or by pressing and dragging over the level bar. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Surround Sound If Equipped Press the Surround Sound button on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen. When this feature is activated, it provides simulated surround sound mode.

281 Radio Uconnect 6.5NAV 1 Radio Station Presets 2 Toggle Presets 3 HD Radio Available 4 Audio Settings 5 Seek Next 6 Direct Tune Radio Stations 7 Seek Previous 8 Browse/Manage Presets 9 Radio Bands 279

282 MULTIMEDIA To access the Radio mode, press the RA- DIO button below the screen. Selecting Radio Stations Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button. Seek Next/Seek Previous Press the up or down Seek Arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek through radio stations. Press and hold either Seek Arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable station once the Seek Arrow button on the touchscreen is released. Direct Tune Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the Tune button on the touchscreen, and entering the desired station number. Store Radio Presets Manually Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To 280 see the 12 preset stations per band, press the Arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle between the two sets of six presets. You can also see all presets for a band by pressing the "Browse" button on the touchscreen. This browse screen lets you delete a preset and shows the station frequency, name and genre. To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below: 1. Tune to the desired station. 2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep. SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race and more. And get 20+ Xtra channels, including SiriusXM Latino, a selection of channels dedicated to Spanish language programming. To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the SXM button on the main Radio screen. The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio mode. Seek Up/Seek Down Press the Seek Arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek through channels in SXM mode. Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable channel once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released. Direct Tune Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing the Tune button on the touchscreen, and entering the desired station number.

283 Tune Start Tune Start begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it s on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play. Traffic & Weather Automatically tells you when Traffic & Weather for a favorite city is available, and gives you the option to switch to that channel. Fav Activates the favorites menu. You can add up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just press Add Fav Artist or Add Fav Song while the song is playing. You will then be alerted any time one of these songs, or works by these artists, is playing on other SiriusXM channels. SiriusXM Parental Controls You can skip or hide certain channels from view if you do not want access to them. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen, press the SiriusXM Setup button on the touchscreen, then select Channel Skip. Press the box, check-mark, next to the channel you want skipped. They will not show up in normal usage. SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call ( for U.S. customers, for Canadian customers) and request the Family-Friendly Package. Browse Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone, Weather and Jump settings also provide a way to browse the SiriusXM channel list. Browse Sub-Menu Description Sub-Menu All Shows the channel listing. Browse Sub-Menu Genre Presets Favorites Game Zone Sub-Menu Description Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within the selected genre. Lets you scroll the list of preset satellite channels. Press the channel, or press enter on the tune knob, to go to that channel. Press the trash can icon to delete a preset. Your presets are also shown at the top of the main Satellite Radio screen. Lets you manage artists and songs in the favorites list and configure Alert Settings to let you know when favorite songs or artists are playing on other channels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of your Favorites. Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game which is being aired on other SiriusXM channels, or when their game score is announced. You can select and manage your teams list here, and configure alerts. 281

284 MULTIMEDIA Browse Sub-Menu Jump Sub-Menu Description Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information, which is used by the jump feature on the main satellite radio screen. Replay Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the content of the current SiriusXM channel. Replay Option Description Option Play/ Pause Rewind/ RW Fast Forward/ FW Press to pause content playback. Press pause/play again to resume playback. Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point. Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound. Replay Option Replay Time Live Option Description Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which your content lags the live channel. Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewound content. SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at for U.S. residents and for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at for U.S. residents and for Canadian residents. All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Media Hub Playing ipod/usb/ MP3 Devices There are many ways to play music from ipod/mp3 players or USB devices through your vehicle's sound system. USB Port And Audio Jack (AUX) 1 USB Port 2 AUX/Audio Jack 282

285 Audio Jack (AUX) The AUX allows a portable device, such as an MP3 player or an ipod, to be plugged into the radio and utilize the vehicle s sound system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Press the MEDIA button, press Select Source and then choose AUX source will change the mode to auxiliary device if the audio jack is connected, allowing the music from your portable device to be heard through the vehicle's speakers. To activate the AUX, plug in the audio jack. The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons. The volume may be controlled using the radio or portable device. To route the audio cable out of the center console, use the access cut out in the front of the console. USB Port Connect your ipod or compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory sticks with audio files can also be used. Then, audio from the device can be played on the vehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display. When connected, the ipod/compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents. The USB device battery charges when plugged into the USB port (if supported by the specific device). To route the USB/iPod cable out of the center console, use the access cut out. When connecting your ipod device for the first time, the system may take several minutes to read your music, depending on the number of files. For example, the system will take approximately five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also during the reading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. This process ensures the full use of your ipod features and only happens the first time it is connected. After the first time, the reading process of your ipod will take considerably less time unless changes are made or new songs are added to the play list. The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic, Nano, Touch, and iphone devices. The USB port also supports playing music from compatible external USB Mass Storage Class memory devices. Some ipod software versions may not fully support the USB port features. Please visit Apple s website for ipod software updates. 283

286 MULTIMEDIA Bluetooth Streaming Audio If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped ipod devices, cell phones or other media players, may also be able to stream music to your vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must be Bluetooth-compatible, and paired with your system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing instructions). You can access the music from your connected Bluetooth device by pressing the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen while in Media mode. Uconnect 6.5NAV Media Hub (USB, AUX Ports) Remote USB Port (Fully Functional) S S N/A Remote USB Port (Charging Only) S = Standard Equipment N/A = Not Available 284

287 ipod/cd/aux Buttons 1 Repeat Music Track 2 Shuffle Music Tracks 3 Music Track Information 4 Songs Currently In Queue 5 Browse Music 6 Music Source The ipod/cd/aux controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen displayed on the side of the screen and choosing between AUX, ipod or Bluetooth. Uconnect will usually automatically switch to the appropriate mode when something is first connected or inserted into the system. 285

288 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect 6.5 NAV Press the NAV button to access the Navigation feature. Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume 1. Press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen from the Nav Main Menu. 2. In the Settings menu, press the Guidance button on the touchscreen. 3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the + or buttons on the touchscreen. 286

289 Uconnect 6.5 NAV 1 Find A Destination 2 View Map 3 View Information 4 Emergency Assistance 5 Repeat Route Guidance Prompt 6 Detour Route 7 Stop Route 8 Navigation Settings 287

290 MULTIMEDIA Finding Points Of Interest From the main Navigation menu, press the Where To? button on the touchscreen, then press the Point of Interest button on the touchscreen. Select a Category and then a subcategory, if necessary. Select your destination and press the Yes button on the touchscreen. Entering A Destination Address From the main Navigation menu press the Where To? button on the touchscreen, then press the Address button on the touchscreen. Follow the on-screen prompts (country, state/province, city, street) to enter the address and press the Yes button on the touchscreen. Destination entry is not available while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can also use Voice Command to enter an address while moving. See Voice Command Tips for more information. To delete your Home location (or other saved locations) so you can save a new Home location, press the Where To? button on the touchscreen from the Main Navigation menu, then press the Go Home button on the touchscreen, and in the Yes screen press the Options button on the touchscreen. In the Options menu press Clear Home. Set a new Home location by following the previous instructions. Finding A Place By Spelling The Name From the Main Navigation Menu press the Where to? button on the touchscreen, press the Points of Interest button on the touchscreen and then press the Spell Name button on the touchscreen. Enter the name of your destination. Press the List button on the touchscreen. Select your destination and press the Yes button on the touchscreen. Setting Your Home Location Press the NAV button to access the Navigation system and the Main Navigation menu. Press the Where To? button on the touchscreen, then press the Go Home button on the touchscreen. You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home address, or choose from recently found locations. Go Home A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, press the Where To? button on the touchscreen, then press the Go Home button on the touchscreen. Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If you depart from the original route, your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major roadways. 288

291 Navigation Map 1 Distance To Next Turn 2 Next Turn Street 3 Estimated Time Of Arrival 4 Your Location 5 Navigation Routing Options 6 Current Street Location 7 Navigation Main Menu 8 Zoom In/Out 289

292 MULTIMEDIA Adding A Stop To add a stop you must be navigating a route: Press the Menu button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation menu. Press the Where To? button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop. When another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous route, add as the first destination or add as the last destination. Press the desired selection and press the Yes button on the touchscreen. Taking A Detour To take a detour you must be navigating a route: Press the Detour button on the touchscreen. If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device might not calculate a detour. For more information, see your Uconnect 6.5 NAV Owner s Manual Supplement. Uconnect 6.5 NAV Voice Recognition Quick Tips Introducing Uconnect Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 6.5 NAV system. 290

293 Get Started 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. Uconnect 6.5 NAV 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first press either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pressing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category. All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. 291

294 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons 1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 Push For Voice Recognition (VR) 3 Push To End Call Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. 292 Push the VR button. After the beep, say: Cancel to stop a current voice session Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

295 Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Uconnect 6.5 NAV Push the VR button. After the beep, say: Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say Help. The system will provide you with a list of commands. 293

296 MULTIMEDIA Media Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and ipod devices. Uconnect 6.5 NAV Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. Change source to Bluetooth Change source to ipod Change source to USB Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your ipod or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed. 294

297 Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Uconnect 6.5 NAV Media U.S./Canadian residents can visit: UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. Push the Phone button. After the beep, say one of the following commands Call John Smith Dial and follow the system prompts Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) Call back (call previous incoming phone number) 295

298 MULTIMEDIA TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say Call, then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say Call John Smith work. Uconnect 6.5 NAV Phone 296

299 Navigation (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button. After the beep, say: Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan. 2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button. After the beep, say Find nearest coffee shop. 297

300 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect Access If Equipped (6.5 NAV) WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/ data) or 3G(data) network connection. Uconnect 6.5 NAV Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access, push the MORE button on the faceplate and then the Apps button on the touchscreen to get started. 298

301 If your vehicle is not connected to an operable 1X (voice/ data) or 3G (data) network, the signal strength bars on the Apps button on the touchscreen will show a single bar and a prohibition symbol to indicate your vehicle is not connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network. Uconnect Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska and Hawaii. Vehicle is not connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. CALL Call Theft Alarm Notification Remote Door Lock/ Unlock Remote Vehicle Start** Remote Horn and Lights Roadside Assistance Call **If vehicle is equipped. ***Extra charges apply. Register (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) Stolen Vehicle Assistance Yelp Search Text Voice Texting Wi-Fi Hotspot*** To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access. 1. Push the ASSIST button on the overhead console. 2. Press the Uconnect Care button on the touchscreen. 3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details. Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or, push the MORE button on the faceplate then press the Apps button on the touchscreen and select the Uconnect registration app to Register By Web and complete the process using your mobile device or computer. Why sign up for Uconnect Access? Here are just a few examples of things you ll be able to do: Know that help, if you need it, is only a button press away. Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds of miles away. Discover great, new places around you using Yelp. Dictate and send text messages by speaking out loud (all while keeping both hands on the wheel!) For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com. 299

302 MULTIMEDIA Mobile App (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) You re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle. Mobile App 1. Download the Uconnect Access App from the App Store or Google Play on your device. 2. Open the app and enter your Mopar Owner Connect account information. Once you download the app to your compatible device, you will also be able to start your vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere. Voice Texting (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message. (Not compatible with iphone.) 1. To send a message, push the Phone button. After the beep, say: Send message to John Smith. 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process your message. 3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect what you d like to do. For instance, if you re happy with your message, after the beep, say Send. TIP: Messages are limited to 140 characters. The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature. Yelp (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you. 1. Push the VR button. After the beep, say: Launch YELP. 2. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen, push the VR button, then say: YELP search. 300

303 3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect the place or business that you d like Uconnect to find. TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display. Yelp 301

304 MULTIMEDIA SiriusXM Travel Link (Uconnect 6.5 NAV US Market Only) Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5-day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 6.5 NAV system. Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the following commands: Show fuel prices Show 5 - day weather forecast Show extended weather TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. 302

305 SiriusXM Travel Link 303

306 MULTIMEDIA Siri Eyes Free If Equipped Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and will respond back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful requests. Getting Started Ensure Siri is enabled On Your iphone. Enable Siri 1 Select Settings On Your iphone 2 Select General 3 Select Siri 4 Enable Siri 1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound system. Refer to Uconnect Phone in this guide for a detailed pairing procedure. 304

307 Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons 1 Phone Pick Up Button 2 Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button 3 Phone Hang Up Button A push and release of the button will start normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold, then release of the button will start Siri functions. 2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri. Examples of Siri commands and questions: "Play Rolling Stones" "Send text message to John" "Read text message from Sarah" "Take me to the nearest coffee shop" 305

308 MULTIMEDIA Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead to ensure your command is understood. Siri is available on iphone 4S and later. Additional Information 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp. Uconnect System Support: DriveUconnect.com U.S. residents call: (24 hours a day 7 days a week) Canadian residents call: (English) or (French) 306 Mon. Fri., 8:00 am 8:00 pm, ET Sat., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET Sun., Closed Uconnect Access Services Support Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call. UCONNECT SETTINGS The Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, System Information, Restore Default Settings, Clear Personal Data, and Compass (Uconnect 5.0) through buttons on the touchscreen. For the Uconnect 5.0 system, push the More button on the faceplate, then press the Settings button on the touchscreen. For the Uconnect 6.5 system, push the Settings button located on the right side of the display. When making a selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the preferred setting until the selection is highlighted showing that setting has been selected. Depending on the vehicles options, the following feature settings could be available: Display Audio Units Phone/Bluetooth Voice SiriusXM Setup Clock System Information Safety & Driving Assistance Lights Doors & Locks Engine Off Options Restore Default Settings Clear Personal Data Compass (Uconnect 5.0) For further information, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia in your Owner s Manual on manuals.

309 UCONNECT PHONE Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling) Uconnect 5.0 Phone Menu 1 Call/Redial/Hold 2 Mobile Phone Signal Strength 3 Currently Paired Mobile Phone 4 Mobile Phone Battery Life 5 Mute Microphone 6 Transfer To/From Uconnect System 7 Uconnect Phone Settings Menu 8 Text Messaging 9 Direct Dial Pad 10 Recent Call Log 11 Browse Phone Book (Contains 911) 12 End Call 307

310 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect 6.5 NAV Phone Menu 1 Favorite Contacts 2 Mobile Phone Battery Life 3 Currently Paired Mobile Phone 4 Mobile Phone Signal Strength 5 Mute Microphone 6 Transfer To/From Uconnect System 7 Conference Call* 8 Manage Paired Mobile Phones 9 Text Messaging** 10 Direct Dial Pad 11 Recent Call Log 12 Browse Phone Book Entries (Contains 911) 13 End Call 14 Call/Redial/Hold * Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices ** Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires Bluetooth MAP profile and a compatible phone) 308

311 The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place and receive hands-free mobile phone calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls using their voice or by using the buttons on the touchscreen (see Voice Command section). The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other wirelessly. If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on your steering wheel, you then have the Uconnect Phone features. The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however some mobile phones/devices may not be equipped with all of the required features to utilize all of the Uconnect system features. For Uconnect Customer Care: U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call Canadian Residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call, (English) or (French). Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system. To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must determine if your mobile phone and software are compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information. Mobile phone pairing is not available while the vehicle is in motion. A maximum of ten mobile phones can be paired to the Uconnect system. Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio Radio 3.0: 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position. 2. Press the Phone button on the faceplate. If there is no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone. 3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. 4. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. Press the Settings button on your mobile phone. Select Bluetooth and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections. 309

312 MULTIMEDIA 5. If No is selected, and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Settings button from the Uconnect Phone main screen. Select Paired Phones then press the Add Device button on the touchscreen. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on the phone, select Uconnect and accept the connection request. 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting. 7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select Uconnect. 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect Phone. Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN number. 9. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If No is selected, simply select Uconnect from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device. Uconnect 5.0: Uconnect Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position. 2. Press the Phone button. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Paired Phones. 5. Select Add device. Uconnect Phone will display an In progress screen while the system is connecting. 310

313 Uconnect 6.5 NAV: Pair Your iphone: 3. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select Uconnect. Complete The iphone Pairing Procedure: Uconnect 6.5 NAV 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position. 2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on the touchscreen. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Paired Phones. 5. Select Add device. Uconnect Phone will display an In progress screen while the system is connecting. Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device To search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled iphone: 1. Press the Settings button. 2. Select Bluetooth. Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections. Pairing Request When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect Phone. Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN number. 311

314 MULTIMEDIA Select The iphone's Priority Level When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting Yes will make this mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If No is selected, simply select Uconnect from the mobile phone/ audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device. Pair Your Android Device: Uconnect Device To search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled Android Device: 1. Push the Menu button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Turn Bluetooth setting to On. Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections. 5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select Uconnect. You may be prompted by your mobile phone to download the phonebook, check Do Not Ask Again to automatically download the phonebook. This is so you can make calls by saying the name of your contact. 312

315 Complete The Android Pairing Procedure: Pairing Request Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile phone matches the passkey shown on the Uconnect system then accept the Bluetooth pairing request. Some mobile phones require the PIN to be entered manually, enter the PIN number shown on the Uconnect screen. Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority Level When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting Yes will make this mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If No is selected, simply select Uconnect from the mobile phone/ audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device. You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel to begin. Refer to UconnectPhone.com for additional information on mobile phone pairing and for a list of compatible phones. Common Phone Commands (Examples) Call John Smith Call John Smith mobile Dial Redial Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call During a call, press the Mute button on the Phone main screen to mute and unmute the call. Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle During an on-going call, press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen to transfer an on-going call between handset and vehicle. 313